Chevrolet | 1999 Blazer | Owner`s manual | Chevrolet 1999 Blazer Owner`s manual

yellowblue
The 1999 Chevrolet Blazer Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the air bag system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
3-1
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4-1
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
6-1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
8-1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-10.
9-1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
yellowblue
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name BLAZER are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new
owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
C9911 A First Edition
ii
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9
ECopyright General Motors Corporation 1998
All Rights Reserved
yellowblue
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in
the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
2-Door Utility
4-Door Utility
About Driving Your Vehicle
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
an accident. Be sure to read the “on-pavement” and
“off-road” driving guidelines in this manual. (See
“Driving Guidelines” and “Off-Road Driving with
Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” in the Index.)
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
iii
yellowblue
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or
in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
iv
yellowblue
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
MASTER
LIGHTING
SWITCH
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
TURN
SIGNALS
WINDSHIELD
WASHER
PARKING
LAMPS
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
POWER
WINDOW
AIR BAG
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS
FOG LAMPS
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
VENTILATING
FAN
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
FUSE
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
LIGHTER
HORN
BRAKE
COOLANT
SPEAKER
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
FUEL
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
v
yellowblue
✍
vi
NOTES
yellowblue
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-11
1-15
1-16
1-16
1-23
1-24
1-24
1-30
1-32
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air Bag System
Center Front Passenger Position
(4-Door Models)
Rear Seat Passengers
1-35
1-38
1-39
1-42
1-53
1-56
1-56
1-57
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults (4-Door Models)
Center Rear Passenger Position
(4-Door Models)
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
1-
1-1
yellowblue
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust
them, and fold them up and down.
Manual Front Seat
CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Move the lever under the front of the manual seat up to
unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it. Then
release the lever and try to move the seat with your body
to make sure the seat is locked into place.
yellowblue
Manual Lumbar Support
If you have this feature,
there will be a knob on the
outside of the driver and
passenger bucket seats.
Power Seats (If Equipped)
If you have this feature, there will be a control pad on
the outside of your seat.
Turn the knob
counterclockwise to
increase lumbar support and
clockwise to decrease
lumbar support.
Horizontal Control: Raise the front of the seat by
raising the forward edge of the button. Lower the front
of the seat by lowering the forward edge of the button.
Move the seat forward by moving the whole button
toward the front of the vehicle.
1-3
yellowblue
Raise the rear of the seat by raising the rear edge of the
button. Lower the rear of the seat by lowering the rear
edge of the button. Move the seat rearward by moving
the whole button toward the rear of the vehicle.
Moving the whole button up or down raises or lowers
the whole seat.
Power Lumbar Control (If Equipped)
If you have this control, it is
located on the left side of
the driver’s seat.
Vertical Control: Move the reclining front seatback
rearward by moving the button toward the rear of the
vehicle. Move the seatback forward by moving the
button toward the front of the vehicle.
Press and hold the front of the control until you have the
desired lumbar support. To decrease lumbar support,
press and hold the rear of the control.
1-4
yellowblue
Memory Seat (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
feature, the control on the
driver’s seat looks like this.
programming the memory button. You will hear a
chime to confirm programming of the transmitter.
When your vehicle is in PARK (P) for an automatic
transmission or the parking brake is engaged for a
manual transmission, push and release the numbered
memory button you just stored. The seat will move to
the set position. You will hear one chime.
Pressing the UNLOCK button of a keyless entry
transmitter will adjust the seat to the corresponding
stored memory position. You will hear one chime.
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to readjust the seat. The transmitter
need not be reprogrammed unless it needs to correspond
to the other numbered memory button.
You can use this memory function to save your
seat cushion and seatback settings by using the
following procedure:
To set the seat for a second driver, follow the previous
steps, but use the other numbered button and the other
keyless entry transmitter.
1. Adjust the driver’s seat to a safe and comfortable
driving position.
If there is a third driver, use the seat adjuster switch to
adjust the seat. Pressing any of the seat adjuster
switches, the SET button or pressing the desired
memory button twice will cause the seat to stop moving.
2. Press the SET button and then one of the two
numbered memory buttons. You will hear a chime
for each button pushed to confirm that your settings
have been placed in memory.
3. To program your keyless entry transmitter, press the
UNLOCK button within five seconds of
If you push the numbered button to adjust the seat and
start the vehicle while the seat is still adjusting,
adjustment will pause while the ignition is in START.
Adjustment will resume after the ignition is in RUN.
1-5
yellowblue
Heated Front Seats (If Equipped)
Reclining Front Seatbacks
If you have this feature, the
control is located on the
side of the seat. This feature
will quickly heat the lower
cushion and lower back of
the driver and front
passenger seats for
added comfort.
Press the lower part of the switch to turn the heater on
low. Press the upper part of the switch to turn the heater
on high. Put the switch in the center position to turn the
heater off.
The passenger’s safety belt must be engaged for the
heated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat.
1-6
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever on the outer side of
the seat.
Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it.
Pull up on the lever and the seat will go to an
upright position.
yellowblue
CAUTION:
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.
1-7
yellowblue
Head Restraints
Head restraints are fixed on some models and adjustable
on others. Slide an adjustable head restraint up or down
so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of
your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck
injury in a crash.
The head restraints tilt forward and rearward also.
Seatback Latches
The front seatback folds
forward to let people get
into the back seat or to
access the storage area
behind the seat.
To return the seatback to the upright position, push the
seatback all the way back until the latch catches. If the
seatback was reclined before being folded forward, it
will return to the reclined position.
CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
Easy Entry Seat (2-Door Models)
The right front seat of your vehicle makes it easy to get
in and out of the rear seat.
D Tilt the right front seatback completely forward and
the whole seat will slide forward.
D Move the seatback to its original position after
To fold the front seatback forward, move the handle
on the side of the seat rearward and pull the
seatback forward.
1-8
someone gets into the rear seat area. Then move the
seat rearward until it locks.
yellowblue
CAUTION:
If an easy entry right front seat isn’t locked, it
can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the person
sitting there could be injured. After you’ve used
it, be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat
to be sure it is locked.
D Tilt the seatback completely forward again to
get out.
Rear Seats
Your vehicle has a folding rear seat which lets you fold
the seatbacks down for more cargo space.
The rear seat release handles are on the rear of the
seatbacks. Push back on the seatbacks as you pull up on
the handles. The head restraint will automatically fold
out of the way when the seatback is folded down.
To raise the seatbacks, just lift up the seatbacks and push until
they lock in the upright position. Push and pull on the
seatbacks to check that the latches have locked in the upright
position. If they haven’t, have them fixed immediately.
1-9
yellowblue
On two-door models with an inside mounted spare tire,
the driver’s side rear seat head restraint must be lifted
and held upright as the seatback is raised. Otherwise, the
head restraint will hit the spare tire and prevent the
seatback from properly latching.
Push and pull on the head restraints to check that they
have locked in the upright position. If they haven’t, have
them fixed immediately.
The rear seat head restraints are adjustable. Push the
button located under the head restraint to raise or lower
it. Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of
the head restraint in closest to your ears. After releasing
the button, push and pull on the head restraint to make
sure it’s locked in place.
To return the head restraints to the upright position,
reach behind the seats and pull the head restraint up until
it locks into position.
1-10
yellowblue
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light that
comes on as a reminder to
buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
1-11
yellowblue
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
1-12
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
yellowblue
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
1-13
yellowblue
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
1-14
or the instrument panel ...
yellowblue
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q:
If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-15
yellowblue
Q:
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about safety
belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller
children and babies. If a child will be riding in your
vehicle, see the part of this manual called “Children.”
Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
1-16
yellowblue
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If
the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
1-17
yellowblue
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or
if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-18
yellowblue
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-19
yellowblue
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-20
yellowblue
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-21
yellowblue
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,
make it straight so it can work properly, or ask
your dealer to fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-22
yellowblue
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-23
yellowblue
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt
properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.
Your vehicle has “Next Generation” frontal
air bags -- one air bag for the driver and another
air bag for the right front passenger.
Next Generation frontal air bags are designed to help
reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating
air bag. But even these air bags must inflate very
quickly if they are to do their job and comply with
federal regulations.
1-24
Here are the most important things to know about the air
bag system:
CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags -- even Next Generation air
bags -- are designed to work with safety belts,
but don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to
work only in moderate to severe crashes where
the front of your vehicle hits something. They
aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear,
side or low-speed frontal crashes. And, for
unrestrained occupants, Next Generation air
bags may provide less protection in frontal
crashes than more forceful air bags have
provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle
should wear a safety belt properly -- whether or
not there’s an air bag for that person.
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the blink
of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as
you would be if you were leaning forward, it could
seriously injure you. This is true even with Next
Generation frontal air bags. Safety belts help keep
you in position before and during a crash. Always
wear your safety belt, even with Next Generation air
bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. This is true even though your vehicle has
Next Generation frontal air bags. Air bags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for
adults, but not for young children and infants.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air
bag system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Children” and
see the caution labels on the sunvisors and the
right front passenger’s safety belt.
There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air
bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
1-25
yellowblue
How the Air Bag System Works
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-26
yellowblue
CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering.
When should an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is
about 14 to 18 mph (23 to 29 km/h). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such
as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The
air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
The air bag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain.
As always, wear your safety belt. See “Off-Road
Driving” in the Index for more tips on off-road driving.
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the
right front passenger.
1-27
yellowblue
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the
instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would
not help you in many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air
bags should never be regarded as anything more than a
supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the air bag inflated.
Some components of the air bag module -- the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the instrument panel
for the right front passenger’s bag -- will be hot for a short
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated
air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from
seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it
stop people from leaving the vehicle.
1-28
CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
D Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module,
which records information about the air bag system.
The module records information about the readiness
of the system, when the sensors are activated and
driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.
yellowblue
D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper service can mean that your air bag
system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not
work properly. You may have to replace the air
bag module in the steering wheel or both the air
bag module and the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.
If your vehicle ever gets into a lot of water -- such as
water up to the carpeting or higher -- or if water enters
your vehicle and soaks the carpet, the air bag controller
can be soaked and ruined. If this ever happens, and then
you start your vehicle, the damage could make the air bags
inflate, even if there’s no crash. You would have to replace
the air bags as well as the sensors and related parts. If your
vehicle is ever in a flood, or if it’s exposed to water that
soaks the carpet, you can avoid needless repair costs by
turning off the vehicle immediately and disconnecting the
battery cables. Don’t let anyone start the vehicle under any
circumstances. See your dealer for service.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the GM Service Manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To
purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
CAUTION:
For up to two minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. They are probably part of
the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-29
yellowblue
Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Q:
If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the
front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bags
from working properly?
A:
As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bags from working properly in a crash.
Q:
Is there anything I might add to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?
A:
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the air bag system from
working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. (The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in the Index.)
1-30
Center Front Passenger Position
(4-Door Models)
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has a front bench seat, someone can sit in
the center position.
yellowblue
When you sit in the center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make
the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along
the belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-31
yellowblue
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted. The shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this
happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
1-32
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
yellowblue
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it
will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-33
yellowblue
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very
quickly out of the retractor.
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
1-34
yellowblue
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
for Children and Small Adults
(4-Door Models)
Four-door models have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides. This feature will provide added safety belt
comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints
and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder belt,
the comfort guide pulls the belt away from the neck
and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position in
the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-35
yellowblue
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-36
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
yellowblue
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide
on top.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions”
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
1-37
yellowblue
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out from
the guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate the
guide and clip inward and in between the seatback and
the interior body, leaving only the loop of elastic
cord exposed.
Lap Belt
Center Rear Passenger Position
(4-Door Models)
When you sit in the center rear seating position, you
have a lap safety belt which has a retractor.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
3. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it.
1-38
yellowblue
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither
the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler
changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
CAUTION:
4. Position and release it the same way as the lap part
of a lap-shoulder belt.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the
release button on the buckle is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. This is true even though your vehicle
has Next Generation frontal air bags. Air bags
plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection
for adults, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its air bag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle.
1-39
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint will say whether it is
the right type and size for your child. A very
young child’s hip bones are so small that a
regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that
any child small enough for one is always properly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
1-40
Infants need complete support, including support for
the head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a frontal crash, an infant in a
rear-facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part
of the infant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby
should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint.
This is so important that many hospitals today won’t
release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is an
infant restraint available for the baby’s first trip in a
motor vehicle.
yellowblue
CAUTION: (Continued)
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.
CAUTION:
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much -- until a
crash. During a crash a baby will become so
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-41
yellowblue
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have protection provided by
appropriate restraints.
Q:
What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take into
consideration not only the child’s weight and size,
but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed,
make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the
center of the vehicle.
1-42
yellowblue
A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant
to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type
of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head,
neck and body can have the support they need in a
frontal crash. Some infant seats come in two
parts -- the base stays secured in the vehicle and
the seat part is removable.
1-43
yellowblue
A forward-facing child restraint (C-E) positions a
child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designed to help
protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs.
(9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches
(66 to 102 cm) in height, or up to around four years
of age. One type, a convertible restraint, is
designed to be used either as a rear-facing infant
seat or a forward-facing child seat.
1-44
yellowblue
A booster seat (F, G) is designed for children who
are about 40 to 60 lbs., or even up to 80 lbs.
(18 to 27 kg, or even up to 36 kg), and about four
to eight years of age. A booster seat is designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Booster seats with shields use lap-only belts;
however, booster seats without shields use
lap-shoulder belts. Booster seats can also help a
child to see out the window.
1-45
yellowblue
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s
manual and the child restraint instructions are important,
so if either one of these is not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in a rear seat outside position. Never put a
rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat.
Here’s why:
1-46
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your
vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags. This
is because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the inflating air
bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat outside position.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but before you do, always
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat outside position.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
yellowblue
Top Strap
Canadian law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap
be anchored.
Don’t use the front set of tie-down brackets. Anchor the
top strap to the rearmost bracket on the same side of the
vehicle as the child restraint.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to
secure the child restraint itself.
If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be
anchored. Anchor brackets for the rear outside seat
positions are located on the floor in the cargo area.
1-47
yellowblue
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-48
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
yellowblue
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-49
yellowblue
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
Center Seat Positions (4-Door Models)
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
Don’t use child restraints in these positions. The
restraints won’t work properly.
1-50
yellowblue
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your vehicle
has Next Generation frontal air bags. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air
bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See
“Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-51
yellowblue
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down
on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-52
yellowblue
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
D Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in
a crash.
D Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
1-53
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
1-54
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is sitting in a rear outside position of a
four-door model, see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” in the Index. If the child is so small that
the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s
face or neck, you might want to place the child in a
seat that has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one.
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in
a crash the child might slide under the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-55
yellowblue
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
1-56
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
yellowblue
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in
this section.
If you ever see a label on
the driver’s or the right
front passenger’s safety belt
that says to replace the belt,
be sure to do so. Then the
new belt will be there to
help protect you in a
collision. You would see
this label on the belt near
the door opening.
1-57
yellowblue
✍
1-58
NOTES
yellowblue
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-6
2-9
2-13
2-13
2-15
2-16
2-16
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-24
2-26
2-33
2-34
Keys
Door Locks
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Endgate/Liftgate
Theft
Content Theft-Deterrent (If Equipped)
PasslockR
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transmission Operation
Manual Transmission Operation
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
2-37
2-38
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-40
2-42
2-48
2-51
2-52
2-55
2-67
2-67
2-68
2-72
2-76
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
(Automatic Transmission)
Locking Rear Axle (If Equipped)
Windows
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Accessory Power Outlets (If Equipped)
Sunroof (If Equipped)
Universal Transmitter (If Equipped)
Instrument Panel
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
2-
2-1
yellowblue
Keys
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-2
yellowblue
This vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition, endgate/liftgate,
spare tire lock (two-door
vehicles) and door locks. It
will fit with either side up.
The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified
locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in
a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to have
new ones made easily using this number. Your selling
dealer should also have this number.
NOTICE:
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides
the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key
code number.
Your vehicle has a number of new features that
can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your keys inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have
extra keys.
2-3
yellowblue
Door Locks
CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers -- especially children -- can easily
open the doors and fall out. When a door is
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and you will be far
better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
2-4
You can use the Keyless Entry System, if you have
this feature.
You can use your key to unlock your door from
the outside.
To lock your door from the inside, slide the lever on
your inside door down.
To unlock the door, slide the
lever on your inside door
up. You will see a red area
on the lever.
yellowblue
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
Rear Door Security Lock (If Equipped)
With this feature, you can
lock the rear doors so they
can’t be opened from the
inside by passengers.
Move the lever up to lock
the doors and down to
release the door locks.
Lockout Prevention
If your vehicle has power door locks, the switch is
located on the armrest. Remove the ignition key and
press LOCK to lock all the doors at once.
To protect you from locking your key in the vehicle, this
feature stops the power door locks from locking when
the keys are in the ignition and a door is open.
To unlock the doors, press the raised area next to the
key symbol.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all the doors will lock and
the driver’s door will unlock.
On four-door models, the switch on each rear door
works only that door’s lock.
2-5
yellowblue
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors and rear endgate from about 3 feet (1 m) up
to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry
transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
2-6
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in
range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry
system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have
to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to
work, try this:
D Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions
that follow.
D Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
yellowblue
Operation
Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle
UNLOCK: When you press UNLOCK, the driver’s
door will unlock automatically, the parking lamps will
flash and the interior lights will go on. If you press
UNLOCK again within three seconds, the remaining
doors will unlock, the parking lamps will flash and the
interior lights will go on.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters
matched to it.
LOCK: Press LOCK to lock all the doors. Press LOCK
again within three seconds and the horn will chirp.
REAR: When you press the REAR button twice within
three seconds to release the rear liftgate glass, the
parking lamps will flash and the interior lights will go
on. If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the
transmission must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, you must
engage the parking brake.
Remote Panic Alarm
When the button with the horn symbol on the key
transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound and the
headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
This can be turned off by pressing the horn button again,
waiting for 30 seconds, or starting the vehicle.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
2-7
yellowblue
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter:
1. Insert a dime in the slot between the covers of the
transmitter housing near the key ring hole. Remove
the bottom by twisting the dime.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+) side up.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security
method used by this system. The transmitter does not
send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver
will not respond to a signal it has been sent previously.
This prevents anyone from recording and playing back
the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons on the transmitter at the same time for seven
seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
2-8
yellowblue
Endgate/Liftgate
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the rear
window, endgate or liftgate open because carbon
monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle.
You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the rear window, endgate
or liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other
cable connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the rear window, endgate
or liftgate:
D Make sure all other windows are shut.
D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting on
VENT or OUTSIDE AIR. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See “Comfort
Controls” in the Index.
D If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Endgate Release
To open a mechanical lock system from the outside,
insert the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise
to unlock the glass.
To open a power lock system from the outside, insert the
key into the lock button and turn counterclockwise. All
doors will unlock.
If your vehicle is equipped with the remote keyless
entry system, your vehicle does not have a lock on
the endgate. It is equipped with a pushbutton to release
the glass.
You may also use the keyless entry system, or the power
door locks, if your vehicle is so equipped.
2-9
yellowblue
When doors are unlocked,
press the button to open
the glass.
The endgate can be opened without a key if the driver’s
door is unlocked. The endgate glass will not release if
the vehicle is in gear.
To lock a power lock system from the outside, insert the
key into the lock button and turn clockwise. All doors
will lock.
Liftgate Release
To open a power lock system from the outside, insert the
key into the lock button and turn counterclockwise. All
doors will unlock.
Reach inside the endgate
to lift the handle and open
the endgate.
2-10
If your vehicle is equipped with remote keyless entry
system, your vehicle does not have a lock on the liftgate.
It is equipped with a pushbutton to release the liftglass.
You may also use the keyless entry system, or the power
door locks, if your vehicle is so equipped.
yellowblue
The liftglass can be opened
using the pushbutton on the
liftgate after the driver’s
door has been opened using
either the power lock
system or the remote
keyless entry system.
To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the
center of the door.
To lock a power lock system from the outside, insert the
key into the lock button and turn clockwise. All doors
will lock. You may also use the keyless entry system or
the power door locks to lock the liftgate and liftglass.
Remote Rear Glass Release
This button on the
passenger’s side of the
steering column allows you
to release the rear glass
from inside the vehicle.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, your shift
lever must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) for the
release to work.
If you have a manual transmission, either with or
without the keyless entry system, you must apply your
parking brake or have the ignition off before you can
open the endgate glass.
2-11
yellowblue
Emergency Release for Opening
Endgate/Liftgate
Endgate-Mounted Spare
If your vehicle has an endgate-mounted spare tire
1. Peel back or slit the carpet locally to expose the
access hole in the trim panel.
carrier, you must move the carrier arm out of the way to
open the glass.
2. Use a thin screwdriver
to reach through the
access holes in both the
trim panel and the
hardware cover.
Here’s how to move the arm:
Pry the release lever
toward the passenger’s
side until the glass latch
pops open.
3. Reattach the carpet securely.
1. Squeeze the release handle to free the carrier arm.
2. Swing the carrier arm away from the endgate. You
may need to give it a slight tug.
3. To latch the carrier arm, swing it toward the endgate.
2-12
yellowblue
Theft
Parking Lots
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your ignition key? What if
you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your
ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking
your key out also locks your transmission. Also
remember to lock the doors.
D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.
D Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
Content Theft-Deterrent
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
With this system, the
SECURITY light will flash
as you open the door (if
your ignition is off).
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
2-13
yellowblue
This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the
remote keyless entry transmitter. The SECURITY
light should come on and stay on.
3. Close all doors. The SECURITY light should go off
after approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the SECURITY light goes off.
If a door is opened without the key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s
headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for 110
seconds, then will turn off to save the battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that you
can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the
alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
D If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
2-14
D Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any other
way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by
pressing UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The alarm won’t stop if you try to unlock
a door any other way.
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for the
SECURITY light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
yellowblue
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the horn
works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps
do not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by an
authorized service center.
PasslockR
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a
valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock
cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will go
off approximately five seconds after the key is turned to
the RUN ignition position.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes,
wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing
before trying to restart the engine. Remember to release
the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine does not start after three (3) tries, the
vehicle needs service.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY light comes
on, you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock system is not
working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.
Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time.
You may also want to check the fuse (see “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers” in the Index). See your dealer for
service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.
2-15
yellowblue
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines:
D Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or
less for the first 500 miles (805 km).
D Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or
slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
D Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
D Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
2-16
Ignition Positions
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be injured or even killed. They could
operate power windows or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in
the vehicle with children.
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to five
different positions.
yellowblue
NOTICE:
Don’t operate accessories in the ACCESSORY
position for long periods of time. Prolonged
operation of accessories in the ACCESSORY
position could drain your battery and prevent
you from starting your vehicle.
LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering
wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.
You will only be able to remove your key when the
ignition is turned to LOCK.
ACCESSORY (A): This position lets you use things
like the radio and the windshield wipers when the
engine is off. Push in the key and turn it toward you.
Your steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was
before you inserted the key.
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. Use OFF if you must have
your vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for
example, if your vehicle is being towed).
RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
START (E): This position starts your engine.
2-17
yellowblue
Key Release Button
CAUTION:
On manual transmission vehicles, turning the key
to LOCK will lock the steering column and result
in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle. This could
cause a collision. If you need to turn the engine
off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only
to OFF. Don’t press the key release button while
the vehicle is moving.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.
Using a tool to force it could break the key or the
ignition switch. If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
2-18
The key cannot be
removed from the ignition
of manual transmission
vehicles unless the key
release button is used.
To remove the key on manual transmission vehicles,
turn the key to OFF. Then turn the key to LOCK while
pressing the key release button down at the same time.
Pull the key straight out.
On automatic transmission vehicles, turn the key to
LOCK and pull it straight out.
yellowblue
Retained Accessory Power
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features
of your vehicle to continue to work up to 20 minutes
after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
Your radio, power windows, sunroof and overhead
console will work when the ignition key is in RUN or
ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from RUN to
OFF, these features will continue to work for up to
20 minutes or until a door is opened.
Starting Your Engine
Automatic Transmission
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is
moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transmission
The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the
parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the
floor and start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if
the clutch pedal is not all the way down -- that’s a
safety feature.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
2-19
yellowblue
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual that tells how to do it
without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START. If it doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down for five more
seconds, unless it starts sooner.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.
When the engine starts, let go of the key and the
accelerator pedal.
2-20
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
In very cold weather, 0_F (-18_C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
yellowblue
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, behind the underhood fuse block.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could
be damaged.
Your automatic transmission may have a shift lever
located on the console between the seats or on the
steering column.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
If your vehicle is equipped with a column shift lever, it
features an electronic shift position indicator within the
instrument cluster. This display must be powered anytime the
shift lever is capable of being moved out of PARK (P). This
means that if your key is in OFF, but not locked, there will be
a small current drain on your battery which could discharge
your battery over a period of time. If you need to leave your
key in the ignition in OFF for an extended period, it is
recommended that you disconnect the battery cable from
the battery to prevent discharging your battery.
PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you start your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
2-21
yellowblue
CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you
have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will be free to
roll -- even if your shift lever is in PARK (P) -- if
your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in
NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic
Transfer Case)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
2-22
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has a
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI). You have to
fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift
from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If you
cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever -- push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)
(press the button in on the console shift lever) as you
maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever
into the gear you wish. See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)”
in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your
transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R) only
after your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see
“Stuck In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
yellowblue
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you’re:
D Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
CAUTION:
D Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people
or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
NOTICE:
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would
also want to use your brakes off and on.
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the
engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
DRIVE (D) should not be used when towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for
off-road driving. Select THIRD (3) when operating the
vehicle under any of these conditions.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD (3)
when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on
steep hills or winding roads or for off-road driving.
You can also use SECOND (2) for starting your vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
2-23
yellowblue
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
selector lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is
moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into
FIRST (1) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transmission. Use your brakes or shift into
PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on
a hill.
Tow/Haul Selector Switch (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a tow/haul selector
switch. This switch will be located on the floor console.
2-24
If your vehicle is equipped with the tow/haul selector
switch, you can use this feature to more efficiently tow
or haul a heavy load.
To select the tow/haul mode, press in on the switch.
The Tow/Haul light on the instrument panel cluster will
come on. To go back to normal operation, press the
switch again. The indicator light on the instrument panel
will go out. See “Tow/Haul Mode” in the Index for
more information.
Manual Transmission Operation
5-Speed
This is your shift pattern.
yellowblue
Here’s how to operate your transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less
than 20 mph (30 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete
stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then,
slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD, FOURTH AND FIFTH (3, 4 and 5): Shift
into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same
way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the
clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal, wait
about six seconds, then shift into REVERSE (R). Then
let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while
your vehicle is moving could damage
your transmission.
Use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, for
parking your vehicle.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake
pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal
and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL.
2-25
yellowblue
Shift Light
If you have a manual
transmission, you have a
SHIFT light.
This light will show you when to shift to the next higher
gear for best fuel economy.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions let
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and
shift when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on
and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift.
2-26
CAUTION:
If you skip more than one gear when you
downshift, you could lose control of your vehicle.
You could injure yourself or others. Don’t shift
down more than one gear at a time when you
down shift.
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and is equipped
with a manual transmission, disregard the SHIFT light
when the transfer case is in 4LO.
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the
part that follows before using four-wheel drive. You
should use two-wheel high (2HI) for most normal
driving conditions.
yellowblue
NOTICE:
Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive. You can choose among three driving settings:
Driving in the 4HI or 4LO positions for a long
time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the
life of your vehicle’s drivetrain.
2HI: This setting is for driving in most street and
highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. When this lamp is lit, it is about
one-half as bright as the others.
Electronic Transfer Case (If Equipped)
If your four-wheel-drive
vehicle has the electronic
transfer case, the transfer
case switches are to the
right of the steering wheel.
4HI: This setting engages your front axle to help
drive your vehicle. Use 4HI when you need extra
traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most
off-road situations.
4LO: This setting also engages your front axle to give
you extra traction. You may never need 4LO. It sends
the maximum power to all four wheels. You might
choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in sand, mud
or deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.
Indicator lights in the switches show you which
setting you are in. The indicator lights will come on
briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will
stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take
your vehicle in for service. An indicator light will flash
while shifting. It will remain illuminated when the shift
is completed.
2-27
yellowblue
Shifting from 2HI to 4HI
Press and release the 4HI switch. This can be done at
any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically.
Shifting from 4HI to 2HI
Press and release the 2HI switch. This can be done at
any speed, and the front axle will unlock automatically.
Shifting from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO
To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO, the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) in vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission or the clutch pedal
engaged in vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission. The preferred method for shifting into
4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to
3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4LO switch. You must
wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and
remain illuminated before shifting your transmission
into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.
If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch
pedal engaged.
2-28
On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your
transfer case does not shift into 4LO, your transmission
indicator switch may require adjustment. With your
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the
4LO switch. While the 4LO indicator light is flashing,
shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the
4LO indicator light remains illuminated before shifting
your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4LO,
but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore
normal operation.
Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI
To shift from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI, your vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal
engaged. The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO
is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to
3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI switch. You must
wait for the 4HI indicator light to stop flashing and
remain illuminated before shifting your transmission
into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.
If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the
vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch
pedal engaged.
yellowblue
On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your
transfer case does not shift into 4HI, your transmission
indicator switch may require adjustment. With your
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the
4HI switch. While the 4HI indicator light is flashing,
shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the
4HI indicator light remains illuminated before shifting
your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4HI,
but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore
normal operation.
Automatic Transfer Case (If Equipped)
The transfer case switches
are to the right of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel. Use these
switches to shift into and
out of four-wheel drive.
You can choose among four
driving settings:
2HI: This setting is used for driving in most street
and highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged
in two-wheel drive. This setting also provides the best
fuel economy.
AUTO 4WD: This setting is ideal for use when road
conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle in
AUTO 4WD, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s
power is sent only to the rear wheels. When the vehicle
senses a loss of traction, the system will automatically
engage four-wheel drive. Driving in this mode results in
slightly lower fuel economy than 2HI.
2-29
yellowblue
4HI: Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such as
on snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations.
This setting also engages your front axle to help drive
your vehicle.
NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” or “Towing Your
Vehicle” in the Index for more information.
4LO: This setting also engages your front axle and
delivers extra torque. You may never need 4LO. It sends
maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose
4LO if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud,
deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.
Indicator lights in the switches show which setting you
are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the
lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle to
your dealer for service. An indicator light will flash
while shifting the transfer case. It will remain
illuminated when the shift is complete. If for some
reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift, it
will return to the last chosen setting.
CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P), or if you have a manual
transmission, even if you are in gear. You or
someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure
to set the parking brake before shifting the
transfer case to NEUTRAL. See “Parking Brake”
in the Index.
If the SERVICE 4WD light stays on, you should take
your vehicle to your dealer for service. See “Service
4WD” in the Index for further information.
Shifting to 4HI or AUTO 4WD
Press and release the 4HI or AUTO 4WD switch. This
can be done at any speed, and the indicator light will
flash while shifting. It will remain illuminated when the
shift is complete.
Shifting to 2HI
Press and release the 2HI switch. This can be done at
any speed.
2-30
yellowblue
Shifting to 4LO
Shifting Out of 4LO
To shift to 4LO, the vehicle’s engine must be running
and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3
mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N)
or with the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with
manual transmission. The preferred method for shifting
into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4LO switch. You
must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing
and remain illuminated before shifting your
transmission into gear.
To shift from 4LO to 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI, your
vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3mph (4.8
km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N), or with
the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with manual
transmission, and the engine running. The preferred
method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle
moving 1 or 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release
the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch. You must wait for
the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop
flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your
transmission into gear.
If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or with the clutch
pedal pressed for vehicles with manual transmission.
After 30 seconds, the transfer case will return to the
setting last chosen.
If the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch is pressed when
your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI, AUTO
4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but
will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving
less than 3mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N) or with the clutch pedal pressed for
vehicles with manual transmission.
2-31
yellowblue
Shifting to NEUTRAL
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL, first make sure
the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll:
To shift out of NEUTRAL:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or have
the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with
manual transmission.
5. Shift the transfer case to 2HI.
6. Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO
buttons for 10 seconds. The red NEUTRAL light
will come on when the transfer case shift to
NEUTRAL is complete.
7. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one
second, then shift transmission to DRIVE (D)
for one second or FIRST (1) for vehicles with
manual transmission.
8. Turn the ignition to OFF.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P) or
FIRST (1) for vehicles with manual transmission.
10. Release the parking brake prior to towing.
2-32
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal.
2. Start the vehicle with the transmission in PARK (P)
or FIRST (1) for vehicles with manual transmission.
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case position
(2HI, 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 4LO).
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or press the
clutch pedal for vehicles with manual transmission.
5. Shift the transmission lever to the desired position.
After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL,
the red light will go out.
6. A re-engagement sound is normal when shifting out
of NEUTRAL.
yellowblue
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake
pedal with your left foot. If the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
Pull the BRAKE RELEASE lever fully. It is located on
the bottom of the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
2-33
yellowblue
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that
follow. If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle
will be free to roll -- even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P) -- if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel
Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. If you’re pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
2-34
Column Shift Lever
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position
like this:
D Pull the lever toward you.
yellowblue
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position
like this:
D Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is in
PARK (P).
D Hold in the button on the lever.
D Push the lever all the way toward the front of
the vehicle.
Console Shift Lever
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is in
PARK (P).
2-35
yellowblue
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission Only)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the
engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. If you have
four-wheel drive, your vehicle will be free to roll
-- even if your shift lever is in PARK (P) -- if
your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. So be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in
NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic
Transfer Case)” in the Index. And, if you leave
the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you (or pressing the button on a console shift
lever). If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t
fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-36
yellowblue
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
CAUTION:
Before shifting out of PARK (P) you must fully
apply your regular brakes. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
Your vehicle has a Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI). You have to fully apply your regular brake
before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is
in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission Operation” in
the Index.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission Models Only)
Before you get out of your vehicle, turn off your engine,
put your manual transmission in REVERSE (R) and
firmly apply the parking brake.
If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle is pulling
a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you want. (You must
press the shift lever button if you have the console
shift lever.)
2-37
yellowblue
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
2-38
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
D Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
D Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
D Repairs weren’t done correctly.
D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
D Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
yellowblue
Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked (Automatic Transmission)
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if
ever you have to, here are some things to know.
CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with
CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in the Index.)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will
be free to roll -- even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P) -- if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel
Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
2-39
yellowblue
Locking Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time,
but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the
other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
Windows
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower your
manual side door windows.
Power Windows (If Equipped)
If you have the optional power windows, the controls
are on each of the side doors. With power windows, the
switches control the windows when the ignition is on or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is present. (See
“Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.) The driver’s
door has a switch for the passenger windows as well.
2-40
Press the side of the switch with the down arrow to
lower the window.
Press the side of the switch with the up arrow to raise
the window.
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature that allows you to lower it without holding the
window switch. Hold the driver’s window switch down
for more than half a second to activate the express-down
feature. Lightly tap the switch to open the window
slightly. The express-down feature can be interrupted at
any time by pressing the up arrow end of the switch.
yellowblue
Lockout Switch
Horn
Four-door vehicles have a lockout feature to prevent
passengers from operating power windows. It is
located on the driver’s door. Press LOCK to activate
this feature. Press NORM and the windows return to
normal operation.
To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the
steering wheel pad.
Swing-Out Windows (2-Door Only)
If your vehicle has rear
swing-out windows, unlatch
them at their clasps and
push out on the glass to
open them.
Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
If you have the tilt
steering wheel, you should
adjust the steering wheel
before you drive.
You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs
more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
When you close the window, be sure the latch catches.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a
comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
2-41
yellowblue
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes your:
D
D
D
D
D
D
Turn and Lane Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
2-42
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
yellowblue
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows don’t
flash but just stay on, a signal bulb may be burned out
and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher is used.
With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will flash
even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front
and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they
are working.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn
signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal lever
to the off position.
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high
to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel will
also be on.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps
to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the
automatic position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, but not
so far that you hear a click.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you
and the high-beam indicator on the dash will come on.
Release the lever to return to normal operation.
2-43
yellowblue
Windshield Wipers
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away
from you to the LO position. For steady high-speed
wiping, turn the band further, to HI. To stop the wipers,
move the band to the OFF position.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Washer
There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer
symbol at the top of the multifunction lever. To spray
washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle. The
wipers will clear the window and then either stop or
return to your preset speed.
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will
stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes, hold the
band on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to LO, the shorter the delay.
2-44
CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
yellowblue
Rear Window Washer/Wiper
This switch is located on the
instrument panel.
To turn the rear wiper on, slide the switch to either LO
or HI. For delayed wiping, slide the switch to LO. For
steady wiping, slide the switch to HI. To turn the wiper
off, slide the switch to OFF.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
With cruise control, you can
maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more
without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can
really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
If you have an automatic transmission and you apply
your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
If you have a manual transmission and you apply your
brakes or push the clutch pedal, the cruise control will
shut off.
To wash the window, press the wash button located on
the switch. The switch must be in either LO or HI.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield
washer. If you can wash your windshield but not your
rear window, check your fluid level.
2-45
yellowblue
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
CAUTION:
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the SET button
at the end of the lever
and release it.
D Cruise control can be dangerous where you
D
can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use it.
2-46
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
yellowblue
Once you’re going about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise
control switch from ON
to R/A for about a half
a second.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press the button at the end of the lever, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed.
D Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at R/A longer than half a second,
the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the
switch or apply the brake. So unless you want to go
faster, don’t hold the switch at R/A.
there until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the switch. To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to R/A. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
D Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
D To slow down in very small amounts, press the
button for less than half a second. Each time you do
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
2-47
yellowblue
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Exterior Lamps
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may want to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
D Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch
pedal, if you have a manual transmission.
D Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
2-48
Your parking lamp and headlamp switch is on the
driver’s side of your instrument panel.
Turn the knob clockwise to the parking lamps symbol to
manually turn on:
D
D
D
D
D
Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
yellowblue
Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn off
your lamps and put the system in auto headlamp mode.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is
off. Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you release the parking brake.
Automatic Headlamp System
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Turn the knob clockwise to the master lamps symbol to
turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps.
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as the
taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the instrument
panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top
of the instrument panel under the radio speaker grill. Be
sure it is not covered or the system will be on whenever
the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and
nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving
under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not
affect the system. The DRL and automatic headlamp
system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a
change in lighting lasting longer than the delay.
Lamps On Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition
is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY. To turn the chime
off, turn the knob all the way to the left or turn the
instrument panel dimmer down to the fully dimmed
position. In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn off
once the ignition key is in OFF.
Daytime Running Lamps (If Equipped)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
2-49
yellowblue
The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at
reduced brightness when:
D
D
D
D
D
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
the ignition is on,
the headlamp switch is in automatic headlamp mode,
the sensor detects daytime light,
an automatic transmission is not in PARK (P), and
the parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on.
The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps
will automatically switch from DRL to the
regular headlamps.
Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions. Your parking lamps must be on for your fog
lamps to work.
To idle an automatic transmission vehicle with the DRL
off, put the transmission in PARK (P). To idle a manual
transmission vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking
brake. The DRL will stay off until you shift out of
PARK (P) or release the parking brake.
The fog lamp switch is on the instrument panel under
the lamps switch. Press the switch to turn the fog lamps
on. Press the switch again to turn them off. A light will
glow in the switch when the fog lamps are on.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
2-50
Fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the
fog lamps will come on again.
yellowblue
Interior Lamps
Front Reading Lamps (If Equipped)
Turn the switch next to the headlamp switch up to make
your instrument panel lights brighter. Turn the switch all
the way up to turn on the interior lamps.
Press the button near each lamp on the overhead console
to turn the reading lamps on and off. The lamps can be
swiveled to point in the desired direction.
If you have the mini console, press the lens on each
lamp to turn it on or off.
Illuminated Entry
Front Map Lamps (If Equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated
entry feature.
If your vehicle has optional front map lamps, they are
located on the inside rearview mirror. They will
automatically come on for approximately 40 seconds when
the doors are unlocked with the keyless entry transmitter
(if equipped) or until the ignition key is turned to RUN
or ACCESSORY. The lamps will also stay on for
approximately 40 seconds after you exit the vehicle unless
you lock the doors with the keyless entry transmitter.
You can also turn the lamps on and off by pressing the
switch near each lamp.
Brightness Control
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come
on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the “out”
position. When all the doors are closed, or the front door
handles are lifted and released, the lamps will stay on
for a short period of time and will turn off automatically.
If you use your keyless entry transmitter to unlock your
vehicle, the interior lights will come on for a short time
whether or not the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the
“out” position.
Dome Lamps
Exit Lighting
The dome lamps will come on when you open the doors.
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition to help you see
while exiting the vehicle. If the DOME OVERRIDE
button is in the “out” position, these lights will stay on
for a short period of time and then will go out.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by rotating the
thumbwheel, located next to the parking/headlamps
knob, all the way up to the top detent position. In this
position, the dome lamps will remain on whether the
doors are opened or closed.
2-51
yellowblue
You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located
below the parking/headlamp knob, to set the dome
lamps to come on automatically when the doors are
opened, or to remain off. To turn the lamps off, press the
button into the “in” position. With the button in this
position, the dome lamps will remain off when the doors
are open. To return the lamps to automatic operation,
press the button again and return it to the “out” position.
With the button in this position, the dome lamps will
come on when you open the door. This will override the
illuminated entry feature, unless you use your remote
keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle.
Mirrors
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, vanity,
reading, glove box and underhood lamps if they are left
on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition is off.
This will keep your battery from running down.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
lamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following to
return to normal operation:
D Shut off all lamps and close all doors, or
D Turn the ignition key to RUN.
2-52
Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you after dark. Push the tab
away from you for normal daytime operation.
yellowblue
Electrochromic Day/Night Inside Rearview
Mirror (If Equipped)
This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from
headlamps behind you. A photocell on the back of the
mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside. Another
photocell built into the mirror surface senses when
headlamps are behind you.
At night, when the glare is too high, the mirror will
gradually darken to reduce glare (this change may take a
few seconds). The mirror will return to its clear daytime
state when the glare is reduced. The mirror will also
return to its clear daytime state when the vehicle is put
into REVERSE (R).
Press the AUTO button at the base of the mirror to turn
on the automatic feature. The button has an indicator
light to show it is on. Press the OFF button to turn the
automatic feature off.
Time Delay
The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which
prevents unnecessary switching from the night back to
the day position. This delay prevents rapid changing of
the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic.
2-53
yellowblue
Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the
photocells when necessary.
Move the upper control to the left or right to choose the
mirror, then press the arrows on the control pad to adjust
the mirror.
Outside Manual Adjust Mirror
Convex Outside Mirror
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side
of your vehicle.
A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more
from the driver’s seat.
Cleaning the Photocells
You can fold them before entering a car wash. Pull the
mirrors in toward the vehicle. Push the mirrors back out
when finished.
Power Remote Control Mirror
The control is located on the
driver’s door armrest.
2-54
CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really
are. If you cut too sharply into the right or left
lane, you could hit a vehicle. Check your inside
mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
yellowblue
Electrochromic Outside Rearview Mirror
(If Equipped)
Overhead Console (If Equipped)
Only the driver’s side outside mirror will adjust for the
glare of headlamps behind you. See “Electrochromic
Day/Night Inside Rearview Mirror” earlier in
this section.
Heated Outside Rearview Mirror
(If Equipped)
When you operate the rear window defogger, a defogger
also warms the heated outside rearview mirrors to help
clear them of ice, snow and condensation. See “Rear
Window Defogger”in the Index for more information.
Glove Box
The overhead console includes reading lamps, a
compartment for a garage door opener, a temperature
and compass display and a storage compartment
for sunglasses.
To open your glove box, lift the lever on the front of the
glove box and lower the door. The glove box should not
be open while driving.
Some models have a driver information system in the
console. See “Driver Information System” later in
this section.
Storage Compartments
2-55
yellowblue
Reading Lamps
Press the button near each
lamp to turn the reading
lamps on and off.
The lamps can also be swiveled to point in the
desired direction.
Installing a Garage Door Opener
If you have a garage door opener, the front
overhead compartment can be used to conveniently
store the opener.
If you have the optional universal transmitter, please see
“Universal Transmitter” in the Index for instructions on
how to use the system.
2-56
To install the garage door opener, first open the
compartment door by pressing the latch forward.
Peel the protective
backing from the hook
and loop patch.
Press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener, as
close to the center of the opener as possible.
Center the garage door opener activation button over
the console door button and press the opener firmly
into place.
yellowblue
The pegs inside the
compartment door are used
to make sure the button on
the compartment door will
contact the control button
on the garage door opener.
Add one peg at a time until the garage door opener
operates with the compartment door closed when you
press the button.
Now, with the compartment
door closed, press the
button again to make sure
the garage door opener
operates properly.
With the garage door opener positioned properly and
the right number of pegs in place, you should only
have to press the button slightly to operate the opener.
Adjust the position of the garage door opener and add
or remove pegs, as needed, until the opener
operates properly.
2-57
yellowblue
Temperature and Compass Display
Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle,
the temperature indicated will be the last outside
temperature recorded with the ignition on.
If the outside temperature is 37_F (3_C) or lower when
you turn on the ignition, ICE will appear on the display.
This is a warning to the driver that road conditions may
be icy, and that appropriate precautions should be taken.
The compass is self-calibrating, so it does not need to be
manually set. However, when your vehicle is new, the
compass may function erratically. If it does, CAL
(Calibration) will appear on the display. To correct the
problem, drive in a complete 360_ circle three times,
and the compass will function normally.
The outside air temperature and the compass are
displayed at the front of the overhead console. The
control switches are located to the left of the display.
Turn the display on or off by pressing the ON/OFF
switch. Display the temperature in either degrees
Fahrenheit (English) or Celsius (metric) by pressing the
US/MET switch.
2-58
Variance is the difference between magnetic north and
geographic north. In some areas, the difference between
the two can be great enough to cause false compass
readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to set
the variance for your particular location:
yellowblue
Driver Information System (If Equipped)
This system displays the outside air temperature,
compass direction and trip information in the
overhead console.
US/MET: The US/MET (United States/metric) button
allows you to switch the display between the English
and metric system.
MODE: The MODE button can be used to toggle
between three modes of operation: OFF, COMP/TEMP
and TRIP.
COMP/TEMP: The display provides the outside
temperature and one of eight compass readings to
indicate the direction the vehicle is facing.
1. Find your location on the zone map. Note your
zone number.
2. Press and hold both the ON/OFF and the US/MET
switches. The display will go off.
3. After five seconds, VAR CAL will appear on the
display. When it does, release both buttons.
4. Press US/MET until your zone number appears on
the display.
5. Press ON/OFF to enter your zone number. Your
variance is now set.
Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle,
the temperature indicated will be the last outside
temperature recorded with the ignition on. If the outside
temperature is 37_F (3_C) or lower, the display will
toggle between the word ICE and the current
temperature every eight seconds. This is a warning to
the driver that road conditions may be icy, and that
appropriate precautions should be taken.
2-59
yellowblue
The compass is self-calibrating, so it does not need to be
manually set. However, if C (Calibration) is displayed,
the compass will need to be calibrated. You may also
place the compass in a noncalibrated mode by pressing
and holding the MODE and US/MET buttons
simultaneously while in the COMP/TEMP mode. After
about 10 seconds, the compass will display C and you
can release the buttons. Drive the vehicle in a complete
360_ circle three times at a speed of less than 5 mph
(8 km/h), and the compass will function normally. Once
the calibration is complete, the display will return to a
compass reading.
Variance is the difference between magnetic north and
geographic north. In some areas, the difference between
the two can be great enough to cause false compass
readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to set
the variance for your particular location:
4. Press US/MET until your zone number appears on
the display.
5. Press MODE to enter your zone number. Your
variance is now set and the display will return to the
COMP/TEMP mode.
TRIP: Once in the TRIP mode, pressing the
MODE button will step you through the following
TRIP functions:
D AVG ECON: The average fuel economy since the
last reset is displayed.
D INST ECON: Instantaneous fuel economy for the
last second of driving is displayed.
D RANGE: The display indicates the estimated
distance that can be travelled with the remaining fuel
in the tank, based on the fuel economy for the last
few hours of driving.
1. Find your location on the zone map earlier in this
section. Note your zone number.
D FUEL USED: The fuel used since the last reset
2. Press and hold both the MODE and the US/MET
buttons in the COMP/TEMP mode.
D AVG SPEED: The average speed since the last reset
3. After five seconds, the compass will acknowledge
the variation mode by displaying the current zone
number. When it does, release both buttons.
2-60
is displayed.
is displayed.
yellowblue
To reset the trip computer, press the MODE and
US/MET buttons simultaneously for at least two
seconds. All functions will be displayed for half a
second once the system is reset. Reset can only be
performed in the AVG ECON, FUEL USED and
AVG SPEED modes. All three modes are
reset simultaneously.
Door Storage
You will find a storage compartment on each of the
front doors.
Four-door models have storage pockets and cupholders
on rear doors.
Front Storage Area
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
The console has a sunglasses storage compartment.
If your vehicle has this console compartment, squeeze
the front lever while lifting the top to open it. You can
store cassettes and compact discs in the slots in front of
the compartment. There is also a lift-out storage tray in
the console.
2-61
yellowblue
Convenience Net (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment, lift
the cover to expose the storage area which includes slots
for cassettes or compact discs and a coinholder.
You may have a convenience net in the rear of your vehicle to
help keep small items, like gloves and light clothing, in place
during sharp turns or quick stops and starts.
The net is not designed to retain these items during
off-road use. The net is not for larger, heavier items.
Attach the upper loops to the retainers on either side of
the endgate/liftgate opening (the label should be in the
upper passenger side corner, visible from the rear of
vehicle). Attach the lower hooks to the rear cargo tie
downs on the floor.
2-62
yellowblue
Cargo Cover (If Equipped)
If you have the optional cargo cover, you can use it to
cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the posts
into the sockets on the inside trim panel on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle to secure it.
Cargo Tie Downs
There are four cargo tie
downs in the rear that allow
you to strap cargo in and
keep it from moving inside
the vehicle.
CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store it
outside of the vehicle. When you put it back,
always be sure that it is securely reattached.
2-63
yellowblue
Luggage Carrier (Option)
CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier -- like paneling, plywood, a mattress, and
so forth -- the wind can catch it as you drive
along. This can cause you to lose control. What
you are carrying could be violently torn off, and
this could cause you or other drivers to have a
collision, and of course damage your vehicle. You
may be able to carry something like this inside.
But, never carry something longer or wider than
the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.
Use GM accessory racks that are compatible with your
luggage carrier for transporting sports equipment. These
are available through your GM dealer.
You can adjust the crossrails to handle loads of various
sizes. Just loosen the slider knobs at each end of the
crossrail and move them to where you want them. Make
sure both sides of the crossrails are even, then tighten
the slider knobs.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded. Follow
these guidelines:
D Carrying small, heavy loads on the roof is
not recommended.
D Tie the load to the tie downs (at either end of
the crossrails). When loading cargo directly on
the roof panel, use the crossrails to keep the load
from shifting.
D If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
The luggage carrier has slats, side rails and crossrails
attached to the roof to secure cargo. The adjustable tie
downs, at either end of the crossrails, should be used to
secure loads to the luggage carrier.
2-64
as far apart as possible. Tie the load to the tie downs
provided. Also tie the load to the bumpers. Do not
tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or side rails
are damaged.
yellowblue
NOTICE:
Loading cargo that weighs more than 200 lbs.
(91 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage your
vehicle. When you carry large things, never let
them hang over the rear or the sides of your
vehicle. When loading cargo on the roof panel, be
sure it rests on the slats and does not scratch or
damage the vehicle.
Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten it
securely to the luggage carrier. Put the main
weight as far forward as you can and move the
rear crossrail forward as far as possible to keep
the load from shifting.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and
cargo are still securely fastened.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Pull the front ashtray door down to open it.
NOTICE:
Don’t put papers and other things that burn into
your ashtray. If you do, cigarettes or other
smoking materials could set them on fire,
causing damage.
To remove the front ashtray, pull the bin upward.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself.
NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overload, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
2-65
yellowblue
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the top and
bottom visors (if your vehicle has one). You can also
swing the bottom visor from side-to-side. Your visors
may have an extension that can be pulled out for
additional glare protection and a strap for holding small
items, such as maps.
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
(If Equipped)
Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the sun visor down and lift the cover to expose the
vanity mirror.
Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn
on the lamps.
2-66
yellowblue
Accessory Power Outlets
(If Equipped)
Sunroof (If Equipped)
If you have accessory power outlets, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment. The accessory power
outlets are located near the center of the vehicle on the
lower part of the instrument panel. Just remove the plug
from the outlet and follow the proper installation
instructions that are included with any electrical
equipment you install.
These circuits are protected by a fuse and have
maximum current levels.
NOTICE:
When using the accessory power outlets,
maximum electrical load must not exceed 20
amps. Always turn off any electrical equipment
when not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on
for extended periods will drain your battery.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close your sunroof, the ignition or
RAP needs to be on. See “Retained Accessory Power”
in the Index.
Press and release the rear side of the button in the mini
console to open the sunroof. You can press the forward
side of the button to close the sunroof. Once the sunroof
is closed, press the forward side of the button to open
the sunroof to the vent position.
The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which you
can pull forward to block sun rays.
2-67
yellowblue
Universal Transmitter (If Equipped)
Full-Size Console
Mini Console
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-68
yellowblue
Programming the Transmitter
Do not use the universal transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door you are programming.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. If you have previously programmed a transmitter
channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down
the two outside buttons on the universal transmitter
until the indicator light begins to flash rapidly (after
20 seconds). Then release the buttons. This
procedure initializes the memory and erases any
previous settings for all three channels.
2. Decide which one of the three channels you want to
program. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter
about 2 to 5 inches (5 to 13 cm) away from the
surface of the universal transmitter so that you can
still see the indicator light.
3. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitter
button and the desired button on the universal
transmitter. Continue to press both buttons
through Step 4.
4. Hold down both buttons until you see the red light
on the universal transmitter flash rapidly. The rapid
flashing indicates that the universal transmitter has
been programmed. Release both buttons once the
light starts to flash rapidly.
If you have trouble programming the universal
transmitter, make sure that you have followed the
directions exactly as described and that the battery in the
hand-held transmitter is not dead. If you still cannot
program it, rotate the hand-held transmitter end over end
and try again. The universal transmitter may not work
with older garage door openers that do not meet current
Federal Consumer Safety Standards. If you cannot
program the transmitter after repeated attempts, refer to
“Training a Garage Door Opener with Rolling Codes”
later in this section or contact the manufacturer of the
unit at 1-800-355-3515.
2-69
yellowblue
Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter
in case you need to erase and reprogram the
universal transmitter.
Note to Canadian Owners: During programming, the
hand-held transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting after one or two seconds. In this case, you
should press and re-press the button on the hand-held
transmitter every two seconds without ever releasing the
button on the universal transmitter. Release both buttons
when the indicator light on the universal transmitter
begins to flash rapidly.
Operating the Transmitter
Press and hold the appropriate button on the universal
transmitter. The indicator light comes on while the
signal is being transmitted.
If the hand-held transmitter appears to program the
universal transmitter but does not open your garage door,
and if the garage door opener was manufactured after
1996, the garage door opener may have a “rolling code”
system. A rolling code system changes the code of the
garage door opener every time you open or close the
garage door.
2-70
To determine if you have this system, press the button
on the universal transmitter that you have programmed
already. If the indicator light flashes rapidly for one to
two seconds, then turns solid, the garage door opener
has a rolling code system. In a rolling code system, the
garage door motor head unit must be trained to the
universal transmitter.
Training a Garage Door Opener with a
“Rolling Code” Feature (If Equipped)
If you have not previously programmed the hand-held
transmitter to the universal transmitter, see
“Programming the Transmitter” listed previously. If you
have completed this programming already, you now
need to train the garage door opener motor head unit to
recognize the universal transmitter. Refer to your garage
door opener owner’s manual for the proper transmitter
training procedure for your garage door opener brand.
1. Find the training button on the garage door opener
motor head unit. The exact location and color will
vary by garage door opener brand. If you have
difficulty finding the training button, refer to your
garage door opener owner’s manual.
yellowblue
2. Press the training button on the garage door
opener motor head unit. An indicator light will
begin to flash when the motor head unit enters the
training mode.
Note: Following this step, you have 30 seconds to
start Step 3.
3. Return to the universal transmitter in your vehicle
and firmly press and release the universal transmitter
button you have already programmed for two to
three seconds. Press and release the button again
(you may need to do this step up to three times) to
make sure that the universal transmitter has been
trained to the garage door opener motor head
unit. Check that the training was successful. The
motor head unit indicator light should no longer
be flashing.
The garage door opener should now recognize the
universal transmitter. You may either use the universal
transmitter or the hand-held transmitter to open the
garage door.
If after following these instructions, you still have
problems training the garage door opener, call the
manufacturer of the unit at 1-800-355-3515.
Erasing Channels
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the
two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.
Accessories
Accessories for the universal transmitter are available
from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like
additional information, please call 1-800-355-3515.
2-71
yellowblue
Instrument Panel
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Air Vents
Instrument Cluster
Transfer Case (If Equipped)
Glove Box
Audio System
Auxiliary Power Outlets
2-72
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Rear Window Defogger
Comfort Controls
Ashtray
Rear Liftgate Release
Rear Window Washer/Wiper
L. Audio Steering Controls
(If Equipped)
M. Brake Release
N. Fog Lamps
O. Lamp Controls
yellowblue
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re
going, about how much fuel you’ve used, and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically.
Standard Cluster, Canada Similar
2-73
yellowblue
Optional Cluster, Canada Similar
2-74
yellowblue
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer (If Equipped)
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
Each tachometer has a different limit depending on the
powertrain in your vehicle. The tachometer has three
areas: normal operating range, red warning range and
red danger range.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip odometer button.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if
it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label must be put on
the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when
the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
To view the trip odometer, press the button near the
readout. To reset the trip odometer, hold the button until
it resets.
The normal operating range shows your engine speed
during normal driving conditions. For example, when
the needle points to 2, it means the engine is running at
2,000 revolutions per minute (rpm). The tachometer
needle will vary all the time that the engine is running.
The shaded red warning range tells you that your engine
speed is reaching its upper limits. Don’t drive very long
with the tachometer in the red warning range. If you
have a manual transmission, shift to a higher gear as
soon as possible. If you have an automatic transmission,
lift your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The solid red danger range tells you that your engine
speed is at its upper limits. You should immediately
shift to a higher gear, or lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
2-75
yellowblue
NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in
the red range, or engine damage will occur.
Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light
will also come on and stay
on for about 20 seconds,
then it will flash for about
55 seconds.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
2-76
yellowblue
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The
system check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.
This light will come on
when you start your engine,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
Charging System Indicator Light
The charging system
light will come on briefly
when you turn on the
ignition, but the engine is
not running, as a check to
show you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate that
you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-77
yellowblue
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on (in RUN), this gage
shows your battery’s state of
charge in DC volts.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Shift Light
You have the shift
light if you have a
manual transmission.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
2-78
Shifting when the indicator light is on will help you get
the best fuel economy. See “Shift Light” in the Index.
yellowblue
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The light
will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully.
If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it
means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should come
on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN.
If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
2-79
yellowblue
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will
come on when you start
your engine and may stay
on for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you
don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-80
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves
into the red area, your
engine is too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you
have been operating your vehicle under normal driving
conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
The “Problems on the Road” section of this manual
show you what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
yellowblue
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life
of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
NOTICE:
Modifications made to the engine, transmission,
exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the
replacement of the original tires with other than
those of the same Tire Performance Criteria
(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls
and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON
light to come on. Modifications to these systems
could lead to costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass
a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
2-81
yellowblue
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
D Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
D Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
2-82
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A
few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
yellowblue
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
Engine Oil Pressure Gage
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
The oil pressure gage
shows the engine oil
pressure in psi (pounds per
square inch) when the
engine is running. Canadian
vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
2-83
yellowblue
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or other problems causing low
oil pressure.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock,
and you should see your dealer.
Also see “Content Theft-Deterrent” in the Index for
additional information regarding the SECURITY light.
Service Four-Wheel-Drive Warning Light
(If Equipped)
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on the
ignition, as a check to show
you it is working.
Security Warning Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
key toward START. The
light will stay on until the
engine starts.
If the light flashes, the PasslockR system has entered a
tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see “Passlock”
in the Index.
2-84
The SERVICE 4WD light comes on to indicate that
there may be a problem with the drive system and
service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent, which may
prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This system is
also designed to assist your service technician in
correctly diagnosing a malfunction.
yellowblue
Tow/Haul Mode Light (If Equipped)
Gate Ajar Light
This light should come on
when the tow/haul mode has
been selected.
For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” in
the Index.
Check Gages Light
The CHECK GAGES light
will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
If this light comes on, your
liftgate is ajar. Try closing
the liftgate again. Never
drive with the liftgate even
partially open.
Fuel Gage
When the ignition is on,
the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have remaining.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure
gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
2-85
yellowblue
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
D At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the
gage reads F (Full).
D It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
Low Fuel Light
The LOW FUEL light will
come on briefly when you
are starting the engine.
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill
the tank.
D The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
D The gage doesn’t go back to E (Empty) when you
turn off the ignition.
2-86
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See “Fuel” in
the Index.
yellowblue
✍
NOTES
2-87
yellowblue
✍
2-88
NOTES
yellowblue
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-10
3-12
3-15
Comfort Controls
Standard Climate Control System
Electronic Climate Control System
(If Equipped)
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
Ventilation System
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock for Systems with
SET Button
Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and
MN Buttons
AM-FM Stereo
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
3-
3-20
3-24
3-28
3-32
3-34
3-37
3-40
3-41
3-41
3-42
3-43
3-43
3-43
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(BoseR) (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
(BoseR) (If Equipped)
Remote Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped)
Console-Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Fixed Mast Antenna
3-1
yellowblue
Comfort Controls
Temperature Knob
With this system, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle.
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area of your vehicle. Move the knob clockwise toward
the red area for warmer air. Move the knob
counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air.
Standard Climate Control System
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
OFF: This setting turns the system off. Some outside air
will still enter the vehicle whenever the vehicle is
moving forward.
Fan Control
The knob on the left side of the heating system control
panel controls the fan speed. To increase airflow, move
the knob clockwise. To decrease airflow, move
it counterclockwise.
3-2
MAX A/C: This setting provides maximum cooling
with the least amount of work. MAX A/C recirculates
much of the air inside your vehicle so it cools quickly.
This setting directs most of the air through the
instrument panel vents and a small amount through the
floor vents.
A/C: This setting cools the air entering your vehicle and
directs most of the air through the instrument panel
vents and a small amount through the floor vents.
yellowblue
BI-LEVEL A/C: This setting cools the air
entering your vehicle and directs it through the heater
floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets.
Electronic Climate Control System
(If Equipped)
VENT: This setting directs most of the air through
the instrument panel outlets and a small amount through
the floor outlets. The air conditioning compressor is not
working when VENT is selected.
HEATER: This setting directs most of the
warmed air through the heater floor outlets and some air
through the windshield defroster outlets.
BLEND: Airflow is divided equally between the
heater floor outlet and the windshield defroster outlets.
DEFROST: This setting directs most air through
the windshield defroster outlets and some through the
heater (floor) outlets.
Fan Control
The knob on the left side of the electronic climate
control panel controls the fan speed. To manually
increase airflow, move the knob clockwise. To manually
decrease airflow, move it counterclockwise.
OFF: If the knob is in OFF, outside air will still enter
the vehicle, and will be directed based on the position of
the mode knob.
AUTO: If the knob is in AUTO, the fan speed will vary
as the system maintains the selected temperature.
3-3
yellowblue
Temperature Knob
Mode Knob - Automatic Operation
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
desired air temperature in your vehicle. This knob will
allow you to adjust the interior air temperature
independently of the function knob setting. Move the
knob clockwise toward 82 for warmer air. Move the
knob counterclockwise toward 66 for cooler air.
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery. When the system is
set for automatic operation, sensors will control the air
delivery mode. Air will come primarily from the floor or
instrument panel outlets, with some air directed to the
windshield to prevent fogging.
Full Hot: If you turn the temperature knob past 82_F
(28_C), the system will go into the “full hot” mode.
The system will remain at that maximum heating setting
and the fan will blow at the speed the fan knob is set to.
If the fan is in AUTO, it will run at full speed.
When the system is in AUTO mode, the air conditioning
light will turn on, and the recirculation and outside air
lights turn off. With the system in full auto control (both
the fan and mode knobs in AUTO), you still have the
ability to override any function. However, continually
overriding the outside air or the A/C compressor will
limit the ability of the system to cool the
vehicle quickly.
Full Cold: If you turn the temperature knob past 66_F
(19_C), the system will go into the “full cold” mode.
The system will remain at that maximum cooling setting
and the fan will blow at the speed the fan knob is set to.
If the fan is in AUTO, it will run at full speed.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the
system to heat or cool any faster.
3-4
If you push a button for a function which is not
available, the light next to that button will flash three
times to alert you that it’s not available.
To find your comfort zone, start with the 74_F (23_C)
setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to
adjust the temperature if necessary.
yellowblue
With the automatic setting, the air conditioning
compressor automatically cycles when needed to cool
the air. In cold weather, when the system senses the need
for heat, the airflow will be directed out the floor
outlets. As the interior temperature approaches a desired
setting, the blower speed will decrease. To maintain
interior comfort, the airflow will adjust between the
instrument panel air outlets and floor outlets. On bright
sunny days in cool weather, the airflow may come out of
the air conditioning and floor outlets (bi-level mode) to
maintain comfort and prevent stuffiness.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the outside air
temperature, engine coolant temperature or the time
since the engine was last started. As the coolant warms
up, the blower fan speed will gradually increase and air
will flow from the heater outlets, with some airflow to
the windshield to prevent fogging under most
normal conditions.
If your vehicle is sitting out on a warm day and you
have the fan set on AUTO, the air will first flow out of
the floor air outlets for a few seconds. That is normal.
This is to expel hot air from the air outlets. As the air is
cooled, the airflow will move through the air
conditioning outlets.
Be careful not to put anything over the solar sensor
located around the center of the instrument panel.
This sensor is used by the automatic system to
regulate temperature.
Mode Knob - Manual Operation
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
You can choose to set the climate control system
operations yourself, or let the system work for you by
placing the system in AUTO mode. See “Mode
Knob - Automatic Operation” earlier in this section.
PANEL: This setting directs most of the air
through the instrument panel outlets and a small amount
through the floor outlets.
BI-LEVEL: Air is delivered through the heater
floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets.
HEATER: This setting directs most of the
warmed air through the heater floor outlets and some air
through the windshield defroster outlets.
3-5
yellowblue
BLEND: Airflow is divided equally between the
heater floor outlet and the windshield defroster outlets.
The air conditioning compressor may run to dehumidify
the air to prevent window fogging.
DEFROST: This setting directs most air through
the windshield defroster outlets and some through the
heater outlets. The air conditioning compressor may run
to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging.
OUTSIDE AIR: Press this button to force the
system to use outside air. Press it again to close off the
outside air.
Pressing the OUTSIDE AIR button will cancel the
RECIRCULATION button.
RECIRCULATION: Press this button to limit
the amount of fresh air entering your vehicle. This is
helpful when you are trying to limit odors entering your
vehicle. In the AUTO mode, the system will use
recirculation as necessary to cool the air. Pressing the
recirculation button will change the operation to a
manual mode and the air will recirculate non-stop. Press
this button again to turn off the recirculation feature.
3-6
RECIRCULATION may be selected with the fan control
in OFF to limit odors, outside air and dust from entering
your vehicle.
Pressing the RECIRCULATION button will cancel the
OUTSIDE AIR button.
A/C: Press this button to turn the air conditioning
on and off. The system will cool and dehumidify the air
inside the vehicle when the A/C light is on.
Air conditioning will be automatically disabled when
the outside temperature drops below a level which air
conditioning is ineffective.
Remember that in order for the automatic system to perform
well, it needs A/C to provide cooling performance.
yellowblue
Air Conditioning
Heating
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed
for the air conditioner to work its best.
The heater works best if you keep your windows closed
while using it. On cold days, use HEATER with the
temperature knob turned clockwise. BLEND is useful in
cool weather when you have fog or ice on the
windshield or side windows.
For quick cool-down on very hot days, use MAX A/C
with the temperature knob turned to the left. This setting
should be used to keep odors and/or dust from entering
the vehicle. For normal cooling on hot days, use A/C
with the temperature knob turned to the left.
If you use the optional engine coolant heater before
starting your engine, your heating system will produce
warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartment in
cold weather. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index.
On vehicles equipped with the Electronic Climate
Control system, this same performance can be achieved
as long as the A/C is enabled and the outside air button
is not active.
Defogging and Defrosting
On cool but sunny days, use BI-LEVEL A/C to deliver
warm air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument
panel outlets.
Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the
windshield quickly in extreme humid or cold conditions.
Turn the temperature knob to the right and move the fan
control toward high.
When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimes
notice slight changes in your vehicle’s engine speed and
power. This is normal because the system is designed
to cycle the compressor on and off to keep the
desired temperature.
On cool, humid days, use BLEND to keep the
windshield and side windows clear.
3-7
yellowblue
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
option, the rear window
will have lines that
warm the glass.
The rear window defogger will stay on for five to seven
minutes, then turn off. If you need additional warming
time, turn it on again. You can turn the defogger off at
any time by pressing the button.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.
NOTICE:
For best results, clear the window of as much snow or
ice as possible before using the rear window defogger.
To turn on the rear window defogger, find the switch
marked REAR with the defog symbol on the lower right
corner of your climate control system. Press the button
until the light in the switch comes on, then release it. It
will only work if the ignition switch is turned to RUN.
Pressing the REAR button on your climate control
system will also activate your heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). This will help to keep ice and snow from
collecting on your mirror surfaces.
3-8
Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp
on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle. Airflow is through the instrument
panel outlets.
Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside air to
the inside of your vehicle when it is moving. When the
vehicle is not moving, you can get outside air to flow
through by selecting any mode and any fan speed.
yellowblue
Ventilation Tips
D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, move the
fan control to high for a few moments before driving
off. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and
moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the
inside of your windows.
D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
You will find air outlets in the center and on the sides of
your instrument panel.
You can direct the airflow side-to-side by rotating the
thumbwheel located in the center of the vent. The vent
can be tilted up and down also. To control the amount of
airflow through the outlets, rotate the thumbwheel
below the vent.
Audio Systems
Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed
to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure.
You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint
yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco
Electronics system can do and how to operate all its
controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out of the
advanced engineering that went into it.
3-9
yellowblue
Setting the Clock for Systems with
SET Button
AM-FM Stereo
Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold the
SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears on
the display. Press and hold the SEEK left arrow until the
correct hour appears on the display.
Setting the Clock for Systems with HR
and MN Buttons
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the
display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute
appears on the display. To display the clock with the
ignition off, press RECALL or HR/MN and the time
will be displayed for a few seconds. There is an initial
two-second delay before the clock goes into the
time-set mode.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and
controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the
radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease volume and turn the
radio off.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing the recall knob. When the radio is playing,
press this knob to recall the station frequency.
3-10
yellowblue
Finding a Station
3. Tune in the desired station.
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM
and FM. The display shows your selection.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there.
SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to listen to a few
seconds of each radio station. SCAN will light up on the
display. Press the right arrow to tune in the next higher
station and press the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station. Press VOLUME or both SEEK buttons to
stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:
5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five
seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
five seconds. Whenever you press the same two
buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3-11
yellowblue
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and
controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the radio
on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to
decrease volume and turn the radio off.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this
knob to recall the station frequency.
3-12
yellowblue
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2.
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
1. Tune in the desired station.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
Finding a Station
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let you
return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 21 stations
(seven AM, seven FM1 and seven FM2). Just:
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
five seconds. Whenever you press the same two
buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
3. Tune in the desired station.
P.SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to scan through each
of your preset stations. The system will scan through
and play each preset station stored on your pushbuttons
for a few seconds. Press either SEEK button or
RECALL to stop scanning through the preset stations.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
Setting the Tone
5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five
seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return.
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3-13
yellowblue
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer
than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player.
Once the tape is playing, use the knobs for VOLUME,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB just as you do for
the radio.
REV: Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the cassette
tape. Press the SEEK right arrow to stop reversing
the tape.
3-14
FWD: Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK left arrow to stop
forwarding the tape.
RECALL: Press this knob to switch tape sides.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape or stop the
tape and play the radio.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
yellowblue
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
Playing the Radio
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is
capable of being rotated continuously.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there. The sound will mute
while seeking.
3-15
yellowblue
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
P. SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then press
P. SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on
your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press
P. SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to a specific preset station. P. SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of
the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the
location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (P1-P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next preset station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
Setting the Tone
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound
will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the
BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will
go blank.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-16
yellowblue
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When
the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display
will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the
rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the six
preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the
music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W
(Country/Western) or JAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press and release this button until the AUTO
TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone
adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a BASS
or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display
will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS to program
AUTO TONE.
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer
than that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press
EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape.
If the ignition is on but the radio is off, the tape will
begin playing.
3-17
yellowblue
Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controls just as you do
for the radio. The tape symbol and a direction arrow will
be on the display whenever a tape is being played.
Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected for
play first.
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is
metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound.
For metal tapes, the double-D symbol will appear on
the display.
PREV (1): Press the PREV button or the SEEK left
arrow to search for the previous selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop
at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.
PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side of
the tape to the other.
NEXT (3): Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right
arrow to search for the next selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop
at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation. The sound
will mute while searching for the next selection.
3-18
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to
the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV
again. The radio will play the last selected station while
reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the reverse operation.
D
(5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display while
the player is in this mode.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape
to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again.
The radio will play the last selected station while
forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the forward operation.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch from a tape to
the radio.
yellowblue
TAPE AUX: Press this button to return to the tape
player when playing the radio. The lighted arrow will
appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in
the active mode.
CD Adapter Kits
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
will now play. EJECT can be used with either the
ignition or radio off. To load a cassette tape with the
ignition or radio off, press EJECT before loading
the cassette.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette
tape player after activating the bypass feature on your
tape player.
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter. It will power up the radio and
begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
3-19
yellowblue
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(BoseR) (If Equipped)
Included with the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape
Player are six BoseR high performance speakers and a six
channel Bose amplifier. Please see your dealer for details.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is
capable of being rotated continuously.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it
again to turn on the sound.
3-20
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
yellowblue
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there. The sound will mute
while seeking.
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound
will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P. SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then press
P. SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on
your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press
P. SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to a specific preset station. P. SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of
the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the
location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (P1-P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. If a
station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease
the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
3-21
yellowblue
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the
rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, BAL, FADE,
BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio.
The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the
display whenever a tape is being played. Anytime a tape
is inserted, the top side is selected for play first.
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is metal
or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound. For metal tapes,
the double-D symbol will appear on the display.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
PREV (1): Press the PREV button or the SEEK left
arrow to search for the previous selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop
at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.
Playing a Cassette Tape
PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side of
the tape to the other.
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer
than that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press
EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape.
If the ignition is on but the radio is off, the tape will
begin playing.
3-22
NEXT (3): Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right
arrow to search for the next selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop
at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation. The sound
will mute while searching for the next selection.
yellowblue
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to
the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV
again. The radio will play the last selected station while
reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the reverse operation.
D
(5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display while
the player is in this mode.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape
to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again.
The radio will play the last selected station while
forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the forward operation.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch from a tape to
the radio.
tape is playing. Press TAPE AUX to switch between the
tape player and console-mounted CD changer if both are
loaded. When a tape is playing, a lighted arrow will
appear on the display and show the direction of play. (If
the radio is turned off, the tape stays in the player and
will resume playing at the point where it stopped.)
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
will now play. EJECT can be used with either the ignition
or radio off. To load a cassette tape with the ignition or
radio off, press EJECT before loading the cassette.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
TAPE AUX: Press this button if you have a tape loaded
in the cassette tape player and the radio is turned on, to
play a tape. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when
3-23
yellowblue
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette
tape player after activating the bypass feature on your
tape player.
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter. It will power up the radio and
begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn this knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is
capable of rotating continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.
3-24
yellowblue
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
Finding a Station
3. Tune in the desired station.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station
and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound
will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-25
yellowblue
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then press
P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your
pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before continuing
to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press P.SCAN
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen
to a specific stored station. P.SCAN will light up on the
display while in this mode. If one of the stations stored on
a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in, the
radio display will show the channel number (P1-P6) for
several seconds before advancing to the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the six
preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the
music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W
(Country/Western) or JAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press and release this button until the AUTO TONE
display goes blank. This will return the tone adjustment to
the BASS and TREB controls. If a BASS or TREB
control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank.
Use PUSHBUTTONS to program AUTO TONE.
Adjusting the Speakers
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass
and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the BASS
control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank.
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When
the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display
will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the
rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
3-26
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
yellowblue
Playing a Compact Disc
PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on. (Please note
that you can also turn the system on when you insert a
compact disc into the player with the ignition on.)
RDM (2): Press this button to play the tracks on the disc
in random order. While in the RDM mode, RANDOM
appears on the display. Press RDM again to return to
normal play.
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the disc
should play. CD and a CD symbol will also appear on
the display. Anytime you are playing a CD, the letters
CD will be next to the CD symbol.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
search for the next selection. If you hold this button or
press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
The next track number will appear on the display. Sound
is muted in this mode.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:
REV (4): Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a
favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the REV button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release REV to resume playing.
D You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc
should play when the road gets smoother.)
D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
D The disc player is very hot.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
search for the previous selection. If you hold this button
or press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
Sound is muted in this mode.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly
within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the FWD button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release FWD to resume playing.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing.
Press it again within five seconds to see how long the
CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is
displayed in minutes and seconds. The track number
will also appear when a new track begins to play. Press
RECALL again to return to the time display.
3-27
yellowblue
AM-FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to
stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol
will still display but the word CD will be replaced with
either AM, FM1 or FM2. (If the radio is turned off, the
disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the
point where it stopped.)
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
(Bose) (If Equipped)
CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio
when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button. To
return to the player, press CD AUX. When a disc is
playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear
on the display. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays
in the player and will resume playing at the point where
it stopped.)
EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the
player and play the radio. When the same or a new disc
is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one. If a
compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than
a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in. The
radio will continue playing. When the ignition is off,
press this button to load a CD.
Included with the AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc
Player are six Bose high performance speakers and a six
channel Bose amplifier. Please see your dealer for details.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn this knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is
capable of rotating continuously.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it
again to turn on the sound.
3-28
yellowblue
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station
and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
Finding a Station
3. Tune in the desired station.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
4. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound
will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-29
yellowblue
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then press
P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your
pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press
P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to a specific stored station. P.SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of
the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the
location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (P1-P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble
and counterclockwise to decrease treble. If a station is
weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
3-30
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the
rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Compact Disc
PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on. (Please note
that you can also turn the system on when you insert a
compact disc into the player with the ignition on.)
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the disc
should play. The letters CD and a CD symbol will
appear on the display. Anytime you are playing a CD,
the letters CD will be next to the CD symbol.
yellowblue
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:
D You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc
should play when the road gets smoother.)
D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
D The disc player is very hot.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
search for the previous selection. If you hold this button
or press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
Sound is muted in this mode.
RDM (2): Press this button to play the tracks on the disc
in random order. While in the RDM mode, RANDOM
appears on the display. Press RDM again to return to
normal play.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
search for the next selection. If you hold this button or
press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
The next track number will appear on the display. Sound
is muted in this mode.
REV (4): Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a
favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the REV button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release REV to resume playing.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly
within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the FWD button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release FWD to resume playing.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing.
Press it again within five seconds to see how long the
CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is
displayed in minutes and seconds. The track number
will also appear when a new track begins to play. Press
RECALL again to return to the time display.
AM-FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to
stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol
will still display but the word CD will be replaced with
either AM, FM1 or FM2. (If the radio is turned off, the
disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the
point where it stopped.)
3-31
yellowblue
CD AUX: Press this button if you have a disc loaded in
the CD player and the radio is turned on, to play a
compact disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when a
compact disc is playing. Press CD AUX to switch between
the compact disc player and console-mounted CD changer
if both are loaded. When a disc is playing, the letters CD
and the CD symbol will appear on the display. (If the radio
is turned off, the disc stays in the player and will resume
playing at the point where it stopped.)
EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the
player and play the radio. When the same or a new disc
is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one. If a
compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than
a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in. The
radio will continue playing. When the ignition is off,
press this button to load a CD.
Remote Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped)
If you have an AM-FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc
Automatic Tone Control System that includes a remote
cassette player, the cassette player is located in the
center of the instrument panel.
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer
than that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, first press
EJECT on the remote player. Then, insert the cassette tape.
The tape will play if the ignition is on but the radio is off.
Once the tape is playing, use the control knobs for VOL,
AUTO TONE, BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB just as you do
for the radio. A lighted tape symbol shows when a cassette
tape is in the player. A lighted arrow will also appear and
show the direction of play when a tape is active.
3-32
yellowblue
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is
metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound.
For metal tapes, the double-D symbol will appear on
the display.
(5): Press this pushbutton to turn Dolby on and off.
Dolby is active when a tape is inserted in the remote
cassette. The double-D symbol will appear on
the display.
Anytime a cassette tape is inserted, the top side is
selected for play first.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow (in the
opposite direction that the lighted tape direction arrow
points) to search for the previous selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is needed for the player to stop
at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation and the
sound is muted in this mode.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow (in the
direction that the lighted tape direction arrow points) to
search for the next selection. The tape direction arrow
will blink during SEEK operation and the sound is
muted in this mode.
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape.
The tape will rapidly reverse to the beginning of the
cassette reel or until you press REV again. The radio
plays the last selected station during REV.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly advance the tape.
The tape will rapidly advance to the end of the cassette
reel or until you press FWD again. The radio plays the
last selected station during FWD.
PROG: Press this button on the remote player to go
from one side of the tape to the other.
TAPE: Press the AM-FM button to switch from the
player and the radio when a tape is playing. To return to
the tape player, press CD AUX. The lighted arrow will
appear next to the symbol and show the direction of play
when a tape is active.
EJECT: Press this button on the remote player to
remove the tape. EJECT can be used with either the
ignition or radio off. Also, you must press EJECT before
loading a cassette with the radio off to allow loading.
3-33
yellowblue
Console-Mounted CD Changer
(If Equipped)
With the compact disc changer, you can play up to six
discs continuously. Normal size discs may be played
using the slots supplied in the magazine.
You must first load the magazine with discs before you
can play a compact disc. Load the CDs from bottom to
top, placing the discs in the magazine label side up. If
you load a disc label side down, the disc will not play
and an error will occur. Repeat this procedure for
loading up to six discs in the magazine.
Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide
open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer. Push
the magazine into the changer in the direction of the
arrow marked on the magazine.
3-34
yellowblue
Close the door by sliding it all the way forward. When
the CD magazine is loaded, the changer will begin
checking for discs in the magazine. This will continue
for up to one and a half minutes, depending on the
number of discs loaded.
To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD
changer door all the way open, then press EJECT.
Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible to
keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer.
Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the
changer, the CD changer symbol will appear on the
radio display. If the CD changer is checking the
magazine for CDs, the CD symbol will flash on the
display until the changer is ready to play. When a CD
begins playing, a disc and track number will be
displayed. The disc numbers are listed on the front of
the magazine.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player (Bose), all of the CD changer
functions are controlled by the radio buttons, except for
ejecting the CD magazine.
PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to
go to the previous track if the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button
is pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection. If you hold or press this button
more than once, the player will continue moving back
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
PROG (2): Press this button to select a disc. The disc
number and track number will be displayed.
NEXT (3): Press this button or the SEEK right arrow to
go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it
more than once, the player will continue moving
forward through the disc. The sound will mute
while seeking.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to seek to the next
selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to search for
the previous selection on the CD. The sound will mute
while seeking.
3-35
yellowblue
P.SCAN: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on
the display. Press P.SCAN again to turn off random play.
TAPE AUX: Press this button if you have a disc loaded
in the changer and the radio is turned on, to play a
compact disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when
a compact disc is playing. Press TAPE AUX to switch
between the tape and console-mounted CD changer if
both are loaded.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Compact Disc Player (Bose), all of the CD changer
functions are controlled by the radio buttons, except for
ejecting the CD magazine.
PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to
go to the previous track if the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button
is pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection. If you hold or press this button
more than once, the player will continue moving back
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
RDM (2): Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on
the display. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
3-36
NEXT (3): Press this button or the SEEK right arrow to
go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it
more than once, the player will continue moving
forward through the disc. The sound will mute
while seeking.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
(5): Press this button to select a disc. The disc number
and track number will be displayed.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to seek to the next
selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to search for
the previous selection on the CD. The sound will mute
while seeking.
CD AUX: Press this button if you have a disc loaded in
the changer and the radio is turned on, to play a compact
disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when a
compact disc is playing. Press CD AUX to switch
between the compact disc and console-mounted CD
changer if both are loaded.
yellowblue
Compact Disc Changer Errors
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
If ERR appears on the display, it could be that:
should play when the road gets smoother.)
THEFTLOCKR is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
D A disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
D The disc player is very hot.
D The CD changer door is open. Completely close the
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power
for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret
code before it will operate.
D You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc
try again.)
changer door to restore normal operation.
D An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer.
Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of
the trays.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, please contact your dealer.
3-37
yellowblue
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to
time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the
secret code number which you have written down.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The
LED indicator by the volume control will begin
flashing when the ignition is turned off.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
3-38
yellowblue
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---, indicating that the radio is
no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in
this section.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
3-39
yellowblue
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain
radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel.
PROG: Press this button to
play a station you have
programmed on the radio
preset buttons on the
selected band.
SEEK: Press the up arrow to tune to the next radio
station and the down arrow to tune to the previous
radio station.
If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, the player
will advance with the up arrow and reverse with the
down arrow.
MUTE: Press this button to
silence the system. Press it
again to turn on the sound.
VOL: Press the up or down
arrow to increase or
decrease volume.
If a cassette tape is playing, press this button to play the
other side of the tape. If a compact disc is playing in the
console-mounted CD changer (if equipped), press this
button to go to the next available CD.
3-40
yellowblue
Understanding Radio Reception
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
AM
D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radio or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
3-41
yellowblue
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on
the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as
soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning method for your cassette
tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).
3-42
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. To
prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the
following steps.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio on.
3. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
4. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and
FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds. The
tape symbol on the display will flash, showing that
the cut tape detection feature is no longer active.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
yellowblue
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may
degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is
in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender.
3-43
yellowblue
✍
3-44
NOTES
yellowblue
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4-9
4-11
4-11
4-13
4-14
4-14
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving Guidelines
Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
4-27
4-29
4-31
4-32
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-37
4-40
4-42
4-45
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
4-
4-1
yellowblue
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
4-2
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or
pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
yellowblue
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much”
if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many
might think. Although it depends on each person and
situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
D The amount of alcohol consumed
D The drinker’s body weight
D The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
D The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
yellowblue
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
yellowblue
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even
fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
4-5
yellowblue
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-6
yellowblue
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking and longer
brake life.
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
4-7
yellowblue
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster
than any driver could. The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and road conditions.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the
brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this is
normal. On vehicles with four-wheel drive, your
anti-lock brakes work at all times -- whether you are in
two-wheel drive or four-wheel drive.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
4-8
yellowblue
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
4-9
yellowblue
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s
the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-10
yellowblue
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a
solid line on your side of the lane or a double
solid line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
4-11
yellowblue
D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the
vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
4-12
D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
yellowblue
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when you have any doubt.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-13
yellowblue
Driving Guidelines
This multipurpose passenger vehicle is defined as a
utility vehicle in Consumer Information Regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) of the United States
Department of Transportation. Utility vehicles have
higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make
them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics give them a
higher center of gravity than ordinary cars. An
advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds
as conventional two-wheel-drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all
possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover.
4-14
Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have
four-wheel drive.
Also, see “Anti-Lock Brakes” in the Index.
If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive, you
shouldn’t drive off-road unless you’re on a level,
solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the
terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t
marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill. In
short, you’ve gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s
why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll
find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help
make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.
yellowblue
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and
service work done. Check to make sure all underbody
shields (if so equipped) are properly attached. Be sure
you read all the information about your
four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough
fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels
up where they should be? What are the local laws that
apply to off-roading where you’ll be driving? If you
don’t know, you should check with law enforcement
people in the area. Will you be on someone’s private
land? If so, be sure to get the necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
D The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
D Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around.
CAUTION:
D Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
D
D
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the
cargo properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof.
Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward
and low as possible.
You’ll find other important information in this manual.
See “Vehicle Loading,” “Luggage Carrier” and “Tires”
in the Index.
4-15
yellowblue
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges
every off-roader to follow these basic rules for
protecting the environment:
D Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
D Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment -- shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses -- or
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).
D Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
D Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.
D Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-16
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.
You are much less likely to get bad surprises. Get
accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of any
blocked or closed roads.
It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be
handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to
use it properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and
close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands,
feet and body, you’ll need to respond to vibrations and
vehicle bounce.
yellowblue
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful
off-road driving. One of the best ways to control your
vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some things to
keep in mind. At higher speeds:
D you approach things faster and you have less time to
scan the terrain for obstacles.
D you have less time to react.
D you have more vehicle bounce when you drive
over obstacles.
D you’ll need more distance for braking, especially
since you’re on an unpaved surface.
CAUTION:
When you’re driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw you
out of position. This could cause you to lose
control and crash. So, whether you’re driving on
or off the road, you and your passengers should
wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different
kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
Surface Conditions. Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow or
ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering, acceleration
and braking of your vehicle in different ways. Depending
upon the kind of surface you are on, you may experience
slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration,
poor traction and longer braking distances.
Surface Obstacles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can be
hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle you if
you’re not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are
hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and fall of
the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:
D Is the path ahead clear?
D Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
D Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? (There’s
more discussion of these subjects later.)
D Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
4-17
yellowblue
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if
you’re not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even
with one or two wheels, you can’t control the vehicle as
well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal
lights. You have to use your own good judgment about
what is safe and what isn’t.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At
the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could
have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink
and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.
4-18
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and
an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t do.
There are some hills that simply can’t be driven, no
matter how well built the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. If
you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you can’t control your speed. If you
drive across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, don’t drive the hill.
yellowblue
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one
of those hills that’s just too steep to climb, descend or
cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small
hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where you
can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the
incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you may
not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by
bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
D Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply
steeper in places?
D Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
D Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
won’t have to make turning maneuvers?
D Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
D What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way to
find out.
D Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they
are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
D Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
steering wheel.
D Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Don’t use more power than you need,
because you don’t want your wheels to start spinning
or sliding.
D Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
4-19
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills,
always try to go straight up.
CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can
cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You
could be seriously injured or killed. As you near
the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
D Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
Q:
What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I can’t make it up the hill?
D Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible
A:
If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here’s what you should do:
the hill.
to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
D Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to
let opposing traffic know you’re there.
D Use your headlamps even during the day. They make
you more visible to oncoming traffic.
D Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it
from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake.
D If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
4-20
yellowblue
D If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) (or, shift to NEUTRAL (N) if your
vehicle has a manual transmission) and restart the
engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R), release the
parking brake, and slowly back down the hill as
straight as possible in REVERSE (R).
D As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This
way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight
and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you
back down the hill with your wheels straight rather
than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel
too far to the left or right will increase the possibility
of a rollover.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or are
about to stall, when going up a hill.
D Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) (or depressing the clutch, if you
have a manual transmission) to “rev-up” the engine
and regain forward momentum. This won’t work.
Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and
you could go out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
D Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall
when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to
stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you to
roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up
the hill, you must back straight down the hill.
Q:
Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the
hill and decide I just can’t do it. What should
I do?
A:
Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in
FIRST (1)) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle.
Leave it in some gear.
4-21
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to
consider a number of things:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P) (or, if you have the manual
transmission, even if you’re in gear). This is
because the NEUTRAL position on the transfer
case overrides the transmission. You or someone
else could be injured. If you are going to leave
your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to PARK (P) (or, put your manual
transmission in FIRST (1)). But do not shift the
transfer case to the NEUTRAL position. Leave
the transfer case in a drive position.
4-22
D How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
D What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
D Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?
Logs? Boulders?
D What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low
gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes and
they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause
loss of control and a serious accident. Apply the
brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low
gear to keep vehicle speed under control.
Q:
Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A:
Yes! These are important because if you
ignore them you could lose control and have a
serious accident.
Q:
A:
Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here’s what to do.
D Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
D Shift to PARK (P) (or to NEUTRAL (N) with the
manual transmission) and, while still braking, restart
the engine.
D Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
D If the engine won’t start, get out and get help.
D When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across.
You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down.
D Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal depressed
in a manual shift. This is called “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
4-23
yellowblue
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide
whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some
things to consider:
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because
the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you
have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have
rolled over.
D A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or
down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the
distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels)
reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end
over end. But when you drive across an incline, the
much more narrow track width (the distance between
the left and right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle
from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an
incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels.
This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover.
D Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something
that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.
D Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with
the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into
a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
4-24
CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that’s too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness of the incline, don’t drive
across it. Find another route instead.
Q:
What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start to
slide downhill. What should I do?
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a
much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface is
like before you drive it.
yellowblue
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline, be
sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get
out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you’ll be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels
won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you’ll need
longer braking distances.
It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud -- the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud, the
idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in wheel
traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the
sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand
dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has
an effect on steering, accelerating and braking. You may
want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly
when driving on sand. This will improve traction.
4-25
yellowblue
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On wet
ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will
have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving,
poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide
out of control.
CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your
vehicle could fall through the ice and you and
your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle
on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems.
But heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood
waters demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles or
exhaust pipe, don’t try it -- you probably won’t get
through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle
and other vehicle parts.
If the water isn’t too deep, then drive through it slowly. At
fast speeds, water splashes on your ignition system and
your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you get
your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your tailpipe is
under water, you’ll never be able to start your engine.
When you go through water, remember that when your
brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers could drown. If it’s
only shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Don’t drive
through rushing water.
See “Driving Through Water” in the Index for more
information on driving through water.
4-26
yellowblue
After Off-Road Driving
Driving at Night
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system
for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling
system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
4-27
yellowblue
Here are some tips on night driving.
D Drive defensively.
D Don’t drink and drive.
D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
D In remote areas, watch for animals.
D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
4-28
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.
yellowblue
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
4-29
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
4-30
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
yellowblue
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
City Driving
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
D Turn on your low-beam headlamps -- not just your
parking lamps -- to help make you more visible to others.
D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
D Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
4-31
yellowblue
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
D Know the best way to get to where you are going.
Freeway Driving
Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown
part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start to
move, check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-32
yellowblue
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to
the next exit.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
4-33
yellowblue
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
D Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
4-34
yellowblue
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. (See “Off-Road
Driving” in the Index for information about d
riving off-road.)
D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
D Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-35
yellowblue
D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let your engine
assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
D Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
D As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car
or an accident.
CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going down
a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine
running and your vehicle in gear when you
go downhill.
4-36
D You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area
or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
yellowblue
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-37
yellowblue
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
D Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
4-38
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
yellowblue
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
D Turn on your hazard flashers.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-39
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
4-40
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
There may be times when you want to tow your vehicle
behind another vehicle for use at your destination. Be
sure to use the proper towing equipment designed for
recreational vehicle towing. Follow the instructions for
the towing equipment.
When towing your vehicle, turn the ignition to OFF.
To prevent your battery from draining while towing,
remove the RDO BATT fuse from the instrument panel
fuse block. Be sure to replace the fuse when you reach
your destination. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in
the Index.
yellowblue
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles and Vehicles
with the Electronic Shift Transfer Case
Two-wheel-drive vehicles and vehicles with the Electronic
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
(Automatic Transfer Case)
Shift Transfer Case should not be towed with all four wheels
on the ground. These transmissions have no provisions for
internal lubrication while being towed. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed on a platform trailer with all
four wheels off the ground. Towing with all four wheels on
the ground should be avoided.
In rare cases when it’s unavoidable and your vehicle has to
be towed with all four wheels on the ground, the propeller
shaft to axle yoke orientation should be marked and the
propeller shaft removed following the applicable service
manual removal/installation procedure. See “Service and
Owner Publications” in the Index.
Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission
through the opening created by removing the propeller
shaft if proper protection is not provided. Also, check
the transmission fluid level before driving the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to correctly tow your
vehicle on all four wheels:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Place the transmission in PARK (P).
3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
4. With the engine running, shift the transfer case to
NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel Drive” in the Index
for the proper procedure to select the neutral position
for your vehicle.
4-41
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Loading Your Vehicle
Shifting the transfer case into NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P), for an automatic transmission, or
if your vehicle is in gear, for a manual
transmission. You or others could be injured.
Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before
you shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL.
See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic Transfer
Case)” in the Index.
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to OFF. The OFF position unlocks
the steering column and reduces battery drain.
Unlocking the steering column will allow the proper
movement of the front wheels and tires
during towing.
4-42
The Certification/Tire label is found on the driver’s door
edge, above the door latch. The label shows the size of
your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to
obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, cargo and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.
yellowblue
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front
and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh
your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to
spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and payloads. Please note your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label or consult your dealer for
additional details.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask
your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else -- they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life
of your vehicle.
4-43
yellowblue
Payload
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and
injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in
a crash.
D Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
D When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving” in the Index.
4-44
The payload capacity is shown on the Certification/Tire
label. This is the maximum load capacity that your
vehicle can carry. Be sure to include the weight of the
occupants as part of your load. If you added any
accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the
factory, remember to subtract the weight of these things
from the payload. Your dealer can help you with this.
Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put a
limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle.
Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install
the new equipment.
NOTICE:
Your warranty doesn’t cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
yellowblue
Towing a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer.
For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes
may not work well -- or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously injured. Pull a trailer
only if you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information about
towing a trailer with your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
Every vehicle is ready for some trailer towing. If yours
was built with trailering options, as many are, it’s ready
for heavier trailers. But trailering is different than just
driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes
in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
4-45
yellowblue
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
D There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
D Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) or less. You should always
use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more
than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer
about sway controls.
D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
4-46
D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
D If you have an automatic transmission, you can use
THIRD (3) (or, as you need to, a lower gear) when
towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in
THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize heat
buildup and extend the life of your transmission. If
you have a manual transmission and you are towing
a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) gear. Just
drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a
lower gear).
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
D the weight of the trailer,
D the weight of the trailer tongue
D and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
yellowblue
Tow/Haul Mode (V6 Engine, Automatic
Transmission Equipped Models) (If Equipped)
The Tow/Haul Mode for hauling a heavy trailer is most
useful under the following conditions
The Tow/Haul Mode is a feature that assists when
pulling a heavy trailer. The purpose of the Tow/Haul
Mode is:
D When driving through hilly terrain at speeds below
D Reduce the frequency of shifts when pulling a
heavy trailer.
D Provide the same shift feel when pulling a heavy
trailer as when the vehicle is unloaded.
D Reduce the need to change throttle position when
pulling a heavy trailer.
This feature is turned on or off by pressing a button on
the floor console. When the feature is on, a light on the
instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that the
Tow/Haul Mode has been selected. See “Tow/Haul
Mode Light” in the Index. The Tow/Haul Mode is
automatically turned off each time the vehicle is started.
55 mph (88 km/h).
D When driving in low speed or stop and go traffic
below 55 mph (88 km/h).
D When driving in parking lots.
Use the Tow/Haul Mode instead of the previous
recommendation to shift to THIRD (3) gear to improve
fuel economy at highway speeds and shift performance
at lower speeds. Operating in the Tow/Haul Mode when
not pulling a heavy trailer will not cause damage to the
vehicle, but you may experience reduced fuel economy
and undesirable performance from the engine and
transmission. The Tow/Haul Mode should be used only
when pulling a heavy trailer.
The Tow/Haul Mode is most effective when the vehicle
and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the maximum
trailer weight rating for the vehicle. See “Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating” and “Trailer Weight” in the Index.
4-47
yellowblue
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
The following chart shows how much your trailer can
weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio Trailer Wt.
2-Wheel Drive,
Auto. Trans.
3.08
3.42
4,500 lbs. (2 043 kg)
5,500 lbs. (2 497 kg)
2-Wheel Drive,
Manual Trans.
3.42
4,000 lbs. (1 818 kg)
4-Wheel Drive,
Auto. Trans.
3.08
3.42
3.73
4,000 lbs. (1 816 kg)
5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg)
5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg)
4-Wheel Drive,
Manual Trans.
3.42
3.73
3,500 lbs. (1 589 kg)
4,000 lbs. (1 816 kg)
4-48
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it
has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of
additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum
trailer weight. The weight of the trailer tongue also
affects the maximum trailer weight. See “Weight of the
Trailer Tongue” later in this section.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
yellowblue
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification/Tire label on the driver’s door edge, above
the door latch, or see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then
be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
4-49
yellowblue
Hitches
Safety Chains
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
D If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
You should always attach chains between your vehicle and
your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack
so you can turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
D Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
Trailer Brakes
weigh more than 3,500 lbs. (1 589 kg), be sure to use
a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and
sway control of the proper size. This equipment is
very important for proper vehicle loading and good
handling when you’re driving.
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the
Index). Dirt and water can, too.
4-50
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
yellowblue
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
D The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
D The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, then make the brake
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends
fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for
this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use
steel brake tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO) could come into your vehicle. You can’t see
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness or
death. (See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.) To
maximize your safety when towing a trailer:
D Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
D Keep the rear-most windows closed.
D If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
MAX A/C or RECIRCULATION because
it only recirculates the air inside your
vehicle. (See “Comfort Controls” in
the Index.)
4-51
yellowblue
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Passing
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
4-52
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
yellowblue
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher (included in
the optional trailering package).
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you
are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transmission overheating. If
you have an automatic transmission, you should use
THIRD (3) when towing a trailer. Operating your
vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will
minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your
transmission. Or, if you have a manual transmission,
it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) gear, just drive in
FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear).
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while
parked (preferably on level ground) with the automatic
transmission in PARK (P) (or the manual transmission out
of gear and the parking brake applied) for a few minutes
before turning the engine off. If you do get the overheat
warning, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
4-53
yellowblue
Parking on Hills
CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People can
be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet, or into gear for a manual
transmission. Then turn your wheels into the curb if
facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake, and then shift into PARK (P), or
REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission.
4-54
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle with an
automatic transfer case, be sure the transfer case is in
a drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL.
6. Release the regular brakes.
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set.
If the transfer case on four-wheel drive vehicles is
in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in
NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic
Transfer Case)” in the Index.
yellowblue
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
D Start your engine;
D Shift into a gear; and
D Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system
and brake system. Each of these is covered in this
manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these
sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-55
yellowblue
Trailer Wiring Harness
The light-duty trailer wiring is a six-wire harness
assembly. The optional heavy-duty trailer wiring is an
eight-wire harness assembly. The harnesses are stored
under the vehicle, along the passenger-side frame
crossmember on two-door vehicles or on the driver’s
side corner frame rear crossmember on four-door
vehicles. The heavy-duty trailer wiring has a 30-amp
feed wire with an inline fuse located by the junction
block. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
Both harnesses have no connector and should be wired
by a qualified electrical technician. The technician can
use the following color code chart when connecting the
wiring harness to your trailer.
D Dark Blue: Use for electric trailer brakes or
auxiliary wiring.
D Red: Use for battery charging; it connects to the
starter solenoid (eight-wire harness only).
4-56
D Light Green: Back-up lamps
(eight-wire harness only).
D Brown: Taillamps and parking lamps.
D Yellow: Left stoplamp and turn signal.
D Dark Green: Right stoplamp and turn signal.
D White (Heavy Gauge): Ground wire.
D White (Light Gauge): Auxiliary stoplamp.
Securely attach the harness to the trailer, then tape or
strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you leave it
loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bend or break, but
not so loose that it drags on the ground. Store the
harness in its original place. Wrap the harness together
and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged.
yellowblue
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-7
5-9
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
5-19
5-19
5-20
5-32
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-
5-1
yellowblue
Hazard Warning Flashers
Press the button on top of
the steering column all the
way down to make your
front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, press the button until the first
click and release.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
5-2
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
yellowblue
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But please use the following steps to do
it safely.
CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
D They contain acid that can burn you.
D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
D They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all
of these things can hurt you.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
The ACDelco FreedomR battery in your vehicle
has a built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or
jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks
clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when
there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a
cranking complaint.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
5-3
yellowblue
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can
reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each
other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection
you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the
electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an
automatic transmission vehicle in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission vehicle in NEUTRAL (N). If
you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle with the
Automatic Transfer Case, be sure the transfer case is
not in the NEUTRAL position.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter, or accessory power outlets, if you have this
option. Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well
as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. In addition, it could save your radio!
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly damaged.
The repair wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
5-4
4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery.
CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the ACDelco FreedomR
battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But if
a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care
of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
yellowblue
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to a metal
engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to negative
(-) or you’ll get a short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts too.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of
the vehicle with the
dead battery.
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+)
terminal of the
good battery.
8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end
touch anything until the
next step. The other end
of the negative cable
doesn’t go to the
dead battery.
It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part on the engine of
the vehicle with the dead battery.
5-5
yellowblue
9. Attach the cable at least
18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts
that move. The electrical
connection is just as
good there, but the
chance of sparks getting
back to the battery is
much less.
12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it
won’t start after a few tries, make sure all
connections are good. If it still won’t start, it
probably needs service.
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5-6
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
yellowblue
Towing Your Vehicle
CAUTION:
To help avoid serious personal injury to you
or others:
D Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is
being towed.
D Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
D Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
D Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
D Always secure the vehicle on each side with
separate safety chains when towing it.
D Use only the correct hooks.
NOTICE:
Use the proper towing equipment to avoid
damage to the bumper, fascia or fog lamp areas
of the vehicle.
With current trends in automotive styles and design, it is
essential that the correct towing equipment is used to tow a
vehicle. Your vehicle can be towed with wheel lift or car
carrier equipment. If your vehicle has a manual transmission,
you must use a towing dolly under the rear wheels when
towing from the front with wheel lift equipment.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles must abide by the following tow
limits when being towed by wheel lift equipment:
D Towing from the front -- 35 mph (55 km/h),
50 miles (80 km)
D Towing from the rear -- 35 mph (55 km/h),
50 miles (80 km)
5-7
yellowblue
When using wheel lift equipment to tow vehicles
equipped with the electronic shift transfer case, a towing
dolly must be placed under the rear wheels when towing
from the front and under the front wheels when towing
from the rear. When using wheel lift equipment to tow
vehicles equipped with the active transfer case, the
transfer case must be in NEUTRAL and the following
tow limits must be used:
D Towing from the front -- 55 mph (88 km/h) or legal
speed limit and distance is unlimited
D Towing from the rear -- 35 mph (55 km/h),
50 miles (80 km)
5-8
NOTICE:
If your vehicle is equipped with four-wheel drive
and the towing limits must be exceeded, a towing
dolly must be used under the front wheels or
vehicle/powertrain damage will occur.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside
Assistance” in the Index.
yellowblue
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Gages” in the Index.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-9
yellowblue
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
D
D
D
D
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3) for
automatic transmissions.
5-10
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off
the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
yellowblue
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
The coolant level should be at least up to the ADD
mark. If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
5-11
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
5-12
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use
only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the
system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use
of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. See if
the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle speed is
doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down. If it
doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
yellowblue
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
NOTICE:
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the ADD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOLR engine coolant at the
coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant” in the
Index for more information.)
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant.
5-13
yellowblue
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
ADD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
5-14
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to
turn the pressure cap.
5-15
yellowblue
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap
and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first
stops. (Don’t press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-16
yellowblue
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
(See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.)
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to ADD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
5-17
yellowblue
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOLR coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
5-18
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.
yellowblue
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel
economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures,
the fan speed increases when the clutch engages. So you
may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and
should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or
making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system
functioning properly. The fan will slow down when
additional cooling is not required and the
clutch disengages.
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-19
yellowblue
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
CAUTION:
CAUTION: (Continued)
5. Put the wheel blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the
one being changed. That would be the
tire on the other side of the vehicle, at
the opposite end.
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
PARK (P) or shift a manual transmission to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear -- not in NEUTRAL.
4. Turn off the engine.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
5-20
yellowblue
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jacking equipment you’ll need is stored along the
driver’s side inner rear quarter panel. In some cases, you
may have to remove the spare tire in order to reach the
jack. Your vehicle is also equipped with work gloves
and a plastic ground mat to assist in the changing of a
flat tire.
To remove your jack cover,
pull up on the latch(es) on
the cover. Remove the
wheel blocks, jack and
wheel wrench.
The following instructions explain how to remove
the spare tire, depending on where it is mounted on
your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Never remove or restow a tire from/to a stowage
position under the vehicle while the vehicle is
supported by a jack. Always tighten the tire fully
against the underside of the vehicle when restowing.
To remove the
underbody-mounted spare,
insert the chisel end of the
wheel wrench, on an angle,
into the hole in the rear
bumper. Be sure the chisel
end of the wheel wrench
connects into the hoist shaft.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench until the spare
tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.
5-21
yellowblue
When the tire has been completely lowered, tilt the
retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the
wheel opening. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
The locking wheel nut can
be removed by snapping the
rubber weather cover off the
face of the lock case.
NOTICE:
To help avoid vehicle damage, do not drive the
vehicle before the cable is properly stored.
If you have an inside-mounted spare tire, the tire must
be removed in order to have access to the jack storage.
To remove an inside-mounted spare tire, reach into your
tire’s cover and unscrew the wing nut at the center of the
wheel. Remove it and the retainer. Unhook the tire from
the mounting bracket and remove the cover.
Insert the key and pull the
lock case straight off. It is
not necessary to turn
the key.
To remove a rear-mounted spare tire, first make sure
that the carrier arm is fully-latched to the endgate. Then
remove the spare tire cover.
Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-22
yellowblue
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and wheel
wrench (B). Your vehicle may also have an optional hub
cap removal tool.
Position the chisel end of your wheel wrench, or hub cap
removal tool (if equipped), in the notch of the hub cap
and pry off the hub cap.
Some of the molded plastic hub caps have imitation
wheel nuts molded into them. The wheel wrench won’t
fit these imitation nuts, so don’t try to remove them with
the socket end of the wheel wrench.
5-23
yellowblue
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
If you have individual wheel nut caps that cover each
nut, they must be removed in order to get to the wheel
nuts. Use the socket end of the wheel wrench to remove
the wheel nut caps.
Your wheel nut caps may attach your hub cap to the
wheel. Remove these wheel nut caps before you take off
the hub cap.
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jack
lift head.
3. Fit the jack into the appropriate hole nearest the
flat tire.
5-24
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
CAUTION:
A. Front Frame Hole
B. Rear Frame Hole (2-Door) or Spring Hanger
Hole (4-Door)
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
5-25
yellowblue
6. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
CAUTION:
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare tire
to fit.
5. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5-26
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
7. Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface.
8. Put the nuts on by hand.
Make sure the
cone-shaped end is
toward the wheel.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against
the hub. If a nut can’t be turned by hand, use the wheel
wrench and see your dealer as soon as possible.
5-27
yellowblue
10. Use the wrench to
tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
100 lb-ft (140 N·m).
5-28
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
yellowblue
Follow this diagram to store the
underbody-mounted spare.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle,
with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear.
2. Pull the retainer through the wheel.
A. Retainer
B. Valve Stem
(Pointed Down)
C. Spare or Flat Tire
D. Spring
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Lower
G. Raise
H. Hoist Arm
3. Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench, on an angle,
through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist
shaft. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise until the tire
is raised against the underside of the vehicle.
You will hear two “clicks” when the tire is secure,
but pull on the tire to make sure.
5-29
yellowblue
Follow this diagram for the inside-mounted spare.
Follow this diagram for the rear-mounted spare.
A. Spare or Flat Tire
A. Wheel Carrier
B. Retainer
B. Spare or Flat Tire
C. Nut
C. Wheel Nut and Locking Nut Cylinder
D. Wheel Carrier
E. Hook
5-30
yellowblue
Reinstall the locking wheel nut using the wheel wrench.
Then push the lock case onto the lug nut until it stops.
The key does not have to be inserted into the lock. Push
the lock case to be sure it is secured. The special lug nut
and lock case is not intended to be used on any road
wheel, only on the spare wheel carrier. Tighten the nuts
on the wheel carrier to 22 to 32 lb-ft (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION:
Make sure the tire and carrier are secure.
Driving with the tire or carrier unlatched could
injure pedestrians or damage the vehicle.
A. Retainer
B. Rubber Band (Some Models)
Return the jack, wheel wrench and wheel blocks to the
proper location in your vehicle’s rear area. Secure the
items and replace the jack cover.
C. Work Gloves
D. Mat
E. Jack Storage Cover
F. Wheel Blocks
G. Hub Cap Removal Tool (Some Models)
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack
J. Jacking Instructions
5-31
yellowblue
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
NOTICE:
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured. And,
the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
5-32
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
yellowblue
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
Using the Recovery Hooks
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear
the area around your front wheels. If you have a four-wheel
drive vehicle, shift into 4HI. Then shift back and forth
between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear (or with a
manual transmission, between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2)
and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels as little as possible.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in
gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may
free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries,
you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery
hooks if your vehicle has them. If you do need to be towed
out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.
The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your
vehicle. You may need to use them if you’re stuck
off-road and need to be pulled to some place where you
can continue driving.
5-33
yellowblue
CAUTION:
The recovery hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never
pull on the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks
could break off and you or others could be
injured from the chain or cable snapping back.
NOTICE:
Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle.
Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not
be covered by warranty.
5-34
yellowblue
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-5
6-7
6-8
6-10
6-15
6-16
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-24
6-24
6-24
6-27
6-28
Service
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch
Rear Axle
Four-Wheel Drive
Radiator Pressure Cap
Thermostat
Engine Coolant
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
6-
6-29
6-33
6-34
6-39
6-41
6-49
6-50
6-52
6-53
6-57
6-58
6-58
6-59
6-65
6-65
6-66
6-66
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
6-1
yellowblue
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
6-2
yellowblue
CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher.
It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications
which have been developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and endorsed by the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Association for
better vehicle performance and engine protection.
Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasolines. For more
information, write to: American Automobile
Manufacturer’s Association, 7430 Second Ave, Suite 300,
Detroit MI 48202.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But
don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
6-3
yellowblue
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control
label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. (See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in the Index.) If this occurs, return to
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis to determine
the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add
anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing
oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to
contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that
you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with
the specifications described earlier.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not
the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not
recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing
MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your
emission control system performance may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument
panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized GM dealer for service.
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
6-4
NOTICE:
yellowblue
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
The fuel cap is behind a hinged door on the driver’s side
of your vehicle.
6-5
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let
go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.
CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
While refueling, hang the cap by the tether from the
hook on the filler door.
6-6
yellowblue
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp”
in the Index.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
D Dispense gasoline only into
approved containers.
D Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
6-7
yellowblue
Checking Things Under the Hood
Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.
CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
To open the hood, first pull
the handle inside the vehicle
on the lower driver’s side of
the instrument panel.
6-8
Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and
put the hood prop into the slot in the hood. You may
have a lamp that comes on when you lift the hood.
yellowblue
When you lift the hood, you’ll see these items:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Battery
Coolant Recovery Tank
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Automatic Transmission Dipstick
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Power Steering Reservoir
Brake Master Cylinder
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Fuse Block
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
6-9
yellowblue
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on
properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer.
Then just pull the hood down firmly to close. It will
latch when dropped from 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm)
without pressing on the hood.
6-10
Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The oil dipstick is a
yellow ring.
Turn off the engine and
give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil
pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show the
actual level.
yellowblue
Checking Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so
much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
6-11
yellowblue
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which
does not carry this Starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has
the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container. If
you have your oil changed
for you, be sure the oil put
into your engine is
American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
6-12
yellowblue
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W-30 if it’s going
to be 0_F (-18_C) or above. These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage
not covered by your warranty.
GM GoodwrenchR oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
-20_F (-29_C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to
advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:
D Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
D You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or
off-road frequently.
D You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
D The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter every
3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first.
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever occurs
first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower.
6-13
yellowblue
Remote Oil Filter (Four-Wheel Drive)
The access door for the
remote oil filter is in the
steering linkage shield
assembly located under
the radiator support. Twist
the screw to unlock or lock
the door. If you open the
door, make sure it is
securely closed when
you are finished.
6-14
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle
it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help.
yellowblue
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
NOTICE:
1. To remove the air cleaner, remove the wing nuts that
hold the cover on.
2. Remove the cover and lift out the air filter.
3. Insert a new air filter, then replace the air cleaner cover.
4. Tighten the wing nuts to hold the cover in place.
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you’re driving.
6-15
yellowblue
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading
on the dipstick.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
NOTICE:
Change both the fluid and filter every 15,000 miles
(25 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.
D In hilly or mountainous terrain.
D When doing frequent trailer towing.
D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
6-16
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be
sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
D
D
D
D
When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180_F to 200_F
(82_C to 93_C).
yellowblue
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50_F
(10_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), drive the
vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes. Then
follow the hot check procedures.
D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
D Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
Checking Transmission Fluid Cold
A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting
for eight hours or more with the engine off and is used
only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five
minutes if outside temperatures are 50_F (10_C) or
more. If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), you may have to
idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low
during a cold check, you must perform a hot check
before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
1. The handle for the
automatic transmission
dipstick is located near
the center of the
engine compartment.
Checking the Fluid Level
D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
D With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and
wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
6-17
yellowblue
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid
while it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a
reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of
the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for
a hot check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less
than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area for a
cold check or in the HOT area or cross-hatched area
for a hot check.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRONR-III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRONR-III
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
D After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
D When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
6-18
yellowblue
Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is
changed. However, the fluid in your manual
transmission doesn’t require changing.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is
cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transmission case.
Then, follow these steps:
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at your GM dealership
Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be
sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
6-19
yellowblue
How to Add Fluid
When to Check and What to Use
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch system in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. A slight amount of play (1/4 inch to
1/2 inch or 6 mm to 12 mm) in the pedal is normal.
It isn’t a good idea to “top off” your clutch fluid.
Adding fluid won’t correct a leak. A fluid loss in this
system could indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repaired.
6-20
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule, Owner Checks and
Services, to determine how often you should check the
fluid level in your clutch master cylinder reservoir and
for the proper fluid. See “Owner Checks and Services”
and “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in
the Index.
yellowblue
How to Check
How to Check Lubricant
The proper fluid should be added if the level does not
reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it’s in place in
the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap.
Rear Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
6-21
yellowblue
Four-Wheel Drive
How to Check Lubricant
Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to
four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, they have two
additional systems that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
6-22
yellowblue
When to Check and Change Lubricant
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Front Axle
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant.
6-23
yellowblue
Radiator Pressure Cap
Thermostat
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOLR engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOLR extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
NOTICE:
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant will:
Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.
D
D
D
D
D
6-24
Give freezing protection down to -34_F (-37_C).
Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.
yellowblue
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use
only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the
system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use
of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOLR coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you
don’t need to add anything else.
6-25
yellowblue
NOTICE:
Checking Coolant
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at ADD, or a
little higher. When your engine is warm, the level should
be up to FULL HOT, or a little higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
6-26
yellowblue
CAUTION:
Power Steering Fluid
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost
never have to add coolant at the radiator. Never
turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a
little -- when the engine and radiator are hot.
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system
or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
6-27
yellowblue
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Adding Washer Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and
the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and
wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and
completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and
look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up
to the proper range.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
6-28
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY with
the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank
is full.
yellowblue
NOTICE:
D When using concentrated washer fluid,
D
D
D
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
6-29
yellowblue
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the
reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid
goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake
lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level
goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out
of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your
brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake
fluid without taking off
the cap.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the
engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot
enough. You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
6-30
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system
checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
yellowblue
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
NOTICE:
D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
D
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
6-31
yellowblue
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake
pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may
come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is
moving (except when you are pushing on the brake
pedal firmly).
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to GM specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
6-32
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this
manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
yellowblue
Replacing Brake System Parts
Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come to expect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Battery
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Your new vehicle comes with an ACDelco FreedomR
battery. When it’s time for a new battery, we recommend
an ACDelco Freedom battery. Get one that has the
replacement number shown on the original battery’s label.
CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
6-33
yellowblue
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps
Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lamps
are off and the engine isn’t running. See “Replacement
Bulbs” in the Index.
One-Piece Composite Headlamp System
1. Open the hood.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your GM dealer’s service department.
Halogen Bulbs
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
2. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly out.
4. Unplug the electrical connector.
6-34
yellowblue
Two-Piece Composite Headlamp System
1. Open the hood.
5. Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to
remove it.
6. Put the new bulb assembly into the headlamp
assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight.
2. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up.
7. Plug in the electrical connector.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly out.
8. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
Install the two retaining clips.
4. Unplug the electrical connector.
6-35
yellowblue
One-Piece Front Turn Signal
Lamp Assembly
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under
“One-Piece Composite Headlamp System” earlier in
this section.
2. Twist the bulb socket to
remove it from the
headlamp assembly.
5. Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to
remove it.
6. Put the new bulb assembly into the headlamp
assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight.
7. Plug in the electrical connector.
3. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the socket.
8. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
Install the two retaining clips.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps into place.
5. Put the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and turn
it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
Install the two retaining clips.
6-36
yellowblue
Two-Piece Front Turn Signal
Lamp Assembly
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under
“Two-Piece Composite Headlamp System” earlier in
this section.
2. Locate the locking tabs
on the assembly.
Squeeze the tabs
together and push that
end of the assembly
out while holding the
tabs. The assembly will
swing out.
4. Turn the harness bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove it.
5. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from
the socket.
3. Unplug the electrical connector.
6. Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps
into place.
7. Put the new bulb into the headlamp assembly and
turn it clockwise until it is tight.
6-37
yellowblue
8. To replace the assembly, snap the outboard end of
the lamp assembly back into the vehicle. Then swing
the assembly in and snap it into place.
9. Replace the headlamp assembly. Install the two
retaining clips.
Taillamps
1. Open the endgate/liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws
from the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.
4. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it.
Push the tab in while you turn the
socket counterclockwise.
5. Holding the base of the bulb, pull the bulb straight
out of the socket.
6. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until
it clicks.
7. Put the socket into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise until it locks in place.
8. Install the lamp assembly. Install and tighten
the screws.
9. Close the endgate/liftgate.
6-38
yellowblue
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” in Section 7 of this manual under Part B “Owner
Checks and Services” for more information.
See “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the
Index for the proper type of replacement blade.
NOTICE:
Use care when removing or installing a blade
assembly. Accidental bumping can cause the arm
to fall back and strike the windshield.
A. Blade Assembly
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
6-39
yellowblue
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab.
Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from
the wiper arm hook.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked by
the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
A. Claw in Notch
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade claws
(A). Slide the insert all the way through the blade
claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic caps (C)
will be forced off as the insert is fully inserted.
6-40
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
yellowblue
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the
hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
See “Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement” in
this section for instructions on how to change the
backglass wiper blade. The backglass wiper blade will
not lock in a vertical position like the windshield wiper
blade, so care should be used when pulling it away from
the vehicle.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see
your GM Warranty booklet for details.
CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
D Overloading your tires can cause overheating
as a result of too much friction. You could
have an air-out and a serious accident.
See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.
D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
D Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact -- such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
D Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
6-41
yellowblue
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Certification/Tire label, which is on the driver’s
door edge, above the door latch, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get the following:
D Too much flexing
D Too much heat
D Tire overloading
D Bad wear
D Bad handling
D Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
6-42
NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
D Unusual wear
D Bad handling
D Rough ride
D Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the
tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
yellowblue
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for
more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
When rotating your tires, always use one of the correct
rotation patterns shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Certification/Tire label. Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut
Torque” in the Index.
6-43
yellowblue
When It’s Time for New Tires
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. (See
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)
6-44
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
D You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
D You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
yellowblue
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certification/Tire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-45
yellowblue
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The
grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
6-46
Traction -- AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
yellowblue
Temperature -- A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required
by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
6-47
yellowblue
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air
and make you lose control. You could have a
collision in which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts for replacement.
CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
If your vehicle has P235/75R15, P235/70R15,
235/70R15 or 31x10.50R15LT/C size tires, don’t
use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there’s not enough clearance.
NOTICE: (Continued)
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
6-48
yellowblue
NOTICE: (Continued)
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it’s contacting your
vehicle, and don’t spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires.
If you have other size tires, use tire chains only
where legal and only when you must. Use only
SAE Class “S” type chains that are the proper size
for your tires. Install them on the drive axle tires
(four-wheel-drive vehicles can use chains on both
axles) and tighten them as tightly as possible with
the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow
the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can
hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and
retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down
until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the
wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
6-49
yellowblue
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil
Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean
normal spots and stains very well. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
D Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
D Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains
are stubborn.
D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the
entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
the container label to form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t
saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
Here are some cleaning tips:
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
D Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
D Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
6-50
yellowblue
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Fabric Protection
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
blood can be removed as follows:
Your vehicle has upholstery and carpet fabric that has
been treated with Scotchgardt Fabric Protector, a 3M
product. It protects fabrics by repelling oil and water,
which are the carriers of most stains. Even with this
protection, you still need to clean your upholstery and
carpet often to keep it looking new.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior
cleaner instructions described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.
Further information on cleaning is available by calling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167).
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean
cloth and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer
for this product.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.
6-51
yellowblue
Cleaning Leather
Care of Safety Belts
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Keep belts clean and dry.
D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
CAUTION:
dealer for this product.
D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
6-52
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. (See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If
abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
yellowblue
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield,
Backglass and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,
sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon AmiR Powder (non-scratching
glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse
it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. (See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Don’t
use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that
contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be
flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface,
or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
6-53
yellowblue
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow
instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.)
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
6-54
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
yellowblue
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on any wheels other than chrome-plated wheels.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the paint
finish and tires.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
6-55
yellowblue
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
6-56
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
yellowblue
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
PART NUMBER
994954
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
1050427
SIZE
23 in. x 25 in.
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
32 oz. (0.946 L)
23 oz. (0.680 L)
1052918**
8 oz. (0.237 L)
DESCRIPTION
Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated
Tar and Road Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner and Polish
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
t Protectant
Armor All
Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner
1052929
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Wheel Cleaner
1052930
8 oz. (0.237 L)
Capture Dry Spot Remover
12345721
2.5 sq. ft.
Synthetic Chamois
12345725
12 oz. (0.354 L)
Silicone Tire Shine
12377964*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Finish Enhancer
12377966*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Cleaner Wax
12377984*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Surface Cleaner
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1052925
16 oz. (0.473 L)
USAGE
Exterior polishing cloth
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,
rubber and vinyl
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
and floor mats
Spray on and rinse with water
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric
Shines vehicle without scratching
Spray on tire shine
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
* For exterior use only.
** Not recommended for use on instrument panels.
t
6-57
yellowblue
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box. It’s
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label is:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
6-58
D
D
D
D
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and
special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
yellowblue
Electrical System
Windshield Wipers
Add-On Electrical Equipment
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem, be
sure to get it fixed.
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
Headlamps
The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. An electrical overload will cause the
lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring
checked right away.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused
by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
6-59
yellowblue
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a
spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse
block is at the driver’s end
of the instrument panel.
Fuse/Circuit Usage
Breaker
Remove the cover by turning the fastener
counterclockwise. Extra fuses and the fuse extractor are
provided in the cover. To reinstall the fuse panel cover,
push in and turn the fastener clockwise.
6-60
A
Not Used
B
Not Used
1
Not Used
2
Cigarette Lighter, Data Link
Connector
yellowblue
Fuse/Circuit Usage
Breaker
3
Cruise Control Module and
Switch, Body Control Module,
Heated Seats
4
Gages, Body Control Module,
Instrument Panel Cluster
5
Parking Lamps, Power Window
Switch, Body Control Module,
Ashtray Lamp
Fuse/Circuit Usage
Breaker
13
Auxiliary Power
14
Power Locks Motor
15
4WD Switch, Engine Controls
(VCM, PCM, Transmission)
16
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
17
Front Wiper
18
Steering Wheel Radio Controls
6
Steering Wheel Radio Controls
19
Radio, Battery
7
Headlamps Switch, Body control
Module, Headlamp Relay
20
Amplifier
8
Courtesy Lamps, Battery
Run-Down Protection
21
HVAC (Manual), HVAC I
(Automatic), HVAC Sensors
(Automatic)
9
HVAC Control Head (Manual)
22
Anti-Lock Brakes
10
Turn Signal
23
Rear Wiper
11
Cluster, Engine Control Module
24
Radio, Ignition
12
Interior lights
6-61
yellowblue
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The fuse block is under the hood at the driver’s side of
the engine compartment.
Remove the cover by turning the fastener
counterclockwise. To reinstall the fuse panel cover, push
in and turn the fastener clockwise.
6-62
Name
TRL TRN
TRR TRN
TRL B/U
VEH B/U
Usage
Trailer Left Turn
Trailer Right Turn
Trailer Back Up Lamps
Vehicle Back Up Lamps
yellowblue
Name
RT TURN
LT TURN
HDLP W/W
LT TRN
RT TRN
RR PRK
TRL PRK
LTHDLP
RTHDLP
FRPRK
INT BAT
ENG I
ECM B
Usage
Right Turn Signal Front
Left Turn Signal Front
Not Used
Left Turn Signal Rear
Right Turn Signal Rear
Right Rear Parking Lamps
Trailer Park Lamps
Left Headlamp
Right Headlamp
Front Parking Lamps
I/P Fuse Block Feed
Engine Sensors/Solenoids, MAF,
CAM, PURGE, VENT
Engine Control Module, Fuel
Pump Module, Oil Pressure
Name
ABS
ECM I
A/C
W/W PMP
HORN
BTSI
B/U LP
IGN B
RAP
LD LEV
OXYSEN
IGN E
MIR/LKS
FOG LP
Usage
Anti-Lock Brake System
Engine Control Module Injectors
Air Conditioning
Not Used
Horn
Brake-Transmission Shift
Interlock
Back Up Lamps
Column Feed, IGN 2, 3, 4
Retained Accessory Power
Not Used
Oxygen Sensor
Engine
Mirrors, Door Locks
Fog Lamps
6-63
yellowblue
Name
IGN A
STUD #2
PARKLP
LR PRK
IGN C
HTDSEAT
HVAC
TRCHMSL
RRDFOG
6-64
Usage
Starting and Charging IGN 1
Accessory Feeds, Electric Brake
Parking Lamps
Left Rear Parking Lamps
Starter Solenoid, Fuel Pump,
PRNDL
Heated Seat
HVAC System
Trailer Center High Mount
Stop Light
Rear Defogger
Name
TBC
CRANK
HAZLP
VECHMSL
HTDMIR
ATC
STOPLP
RR W/W
Usage
Truck Body Computer
Clutch Switch, NSBU Switch
Hazard Lamps
Vehicle Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
Heated Mirror
Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive)
Stop Lamps
Rear Window Wiper
yellowblue
Replacement Bulbs
Lamps
Quantity
Number
Halogen Headlamps, Composite Low Beam
2
9006 HB4
Halogen Headlamps, Composite High Beam
2
9005 HB3
Tail and Stop Lamps
4
3057
Front Sidemarker Lamps
2
194 NA
Front Turn Signal Lamps
2
3157
Turn Signal Lamps
2
3157 NA
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . “VORTEC” 4300
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V6
VIN Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6-5-4-3-2
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 at 4,400 rpm
Thermostat Specification . . . . . . . . . . . 195_F (91_C)
Spark Plug Gap . . . . . . . . . . 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
Wheels and Tires
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . 100 lb-ft (140 N·m)
Tire Pressure . . . . . . See the Certification/Tire label.
See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.
6-65
yellowblue
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.
If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used.
If you’re not sure, ask your dealer.
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are
based on the latest information available at the time of
printing, and are subject to change. If a part listed in this
manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle
when it was built, or if you have any questions, please
contact your GM dealer.
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12559051
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PF52
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1163C
PCV Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CV769C
Automatic Transmission Filter Kit . . . . . . 24200796
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-932
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GF481
Front Windshield
Wiper Blade . . . . . . . . . . Trico (20 inches/50.8 cm)
Backglass Wiper Blade . . . Trico (14 inches/35.6 cm)
6-66
Capacities (Approximate)
Cooling System*
Automatic Trans. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7 quarts (11.1 L)
Manual Trans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 quarts (11.3 L)
Crankcase* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
Automatic Transmission
(Drain and Refill)* . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 quarts (4.7 L)
Differential Fluid
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 pints (1.9 L)
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 pints (1.2 L)
Fuel Tank (2-Door Models) . . . . 19.0 gallons (72.0 L)
Fuel Tank (4-Door Models) . . . . 18.0 gallons (68.0 L)
A/C Refrigerant . . . . . . . 1.75 lbs (0.79 kg) of R-134a
*After refill, the level must be checked.
yellowblue
Vehicle Dimensions*
Wheelbase
2-Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100.5 inches (255.3 cm)
4-Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107.0 inches (271.8 cm)
Length
2WD 2-Door . . . . . . . . . . . 175.0 inches (444.5 cm)
4WD 2-Door . . . . . . . . . . . 175.4 inches (445.5 cm)
4WD 4-Door . . . . . . . . . . . 181.1 inches (460.0 cm)
Height
2WD 2-Door . . . . . . . . . . . . 66.0 inches (167.6 cm)
4WD 2-Door . . . . . . . . . . . . 66.9 inches (170.0 cm)
2WD 4-Door . . . . . . . . . . . . 65.9 inches (167.4 cm)
4WD 4-Door . . . . . . . . . . . . 67.0 inches (170.2 cm)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Tread
2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Tread
2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67.8 inches (172.2 cm)
55.0 inches (139.6 cm)
57.3 inches (145.4 cm)
54.7 inches (138.8 cm)
55.1 inches (139.9 cm)
*Figures reflect base equipment only.
6-67
yellowblue
✍
6-68
NOTES
yellowblue
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-4
7-7
7-28
Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7-40
7-45
7-47
7-50
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
7-
7-1
yellowblue
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your dealer
for details.
7-2
yellowblue
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you
what should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains important inspections that your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
lists some recommended products to help keep your
vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place
for you to record the maintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to write it down in this part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should be done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service
information. See “Service and Owner Publications” in
the Index.
7-3
yellowblue
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or
you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives
the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
D carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.
D are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See “Off-Road Driving With Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” in the Index.
D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:
7-4
Selecting the Right Schedule
yellowblue
Scheduled Maintenance
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if
any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
D Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
D You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or
off-road frequently.
D You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
D If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner.
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis
Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Drive
Axle Service (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. Automatic
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and
Lines Inspection.
7-5
yellowblue
Scheduled Maintenance
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance is true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area
or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City
schedule for these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil to break
down slower.
7-6
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Drive Axle Service. Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Air Cleaner Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and
Lines Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
D Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
** Drive axle service (see “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use):
D
D
engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check
fluid level and add fluid as needed. If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
fluid as needed at every oil change. If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
More frequent lubrication may be required for
heavy-duty or off-road use.
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines,
universal joints and brake pedal springs.
7-7
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
7-8
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
(Continued)
7-9
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
15,000 Miles (25 000 km) (Continued)
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
j
j
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-10
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
(Continued)
7-11
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
27,000 Miles (45 000 km) (Continued)
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j
j
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
7-12
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
j
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
(Continued)
7-13
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
36,000 Miles (60 000 km) (Continued)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j
j
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-14
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
7-15
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
7-16
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
7-17
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
7-18
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
(Continued)
7-19
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
66,000 Miles (110 000 km) (Continued)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-20
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
7-21
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
7-22
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
(Continued)
7-23
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued)
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j
j
7-24
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
(Continued)
7-25
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
99,000 Miles (165 000 km) (Continued)
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j
j
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
j Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
j
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
7-26
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellowblue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-27
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
7-28
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines,
universal joints and brake pedal springs.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
** Drive axle service (see “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use):
D Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
D
engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check
fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
fluid as needed at every engine oil change.
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
(Continued)
7-29
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
15,000 Miles (25 000 km) (Continued)
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
7-30
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
7-31
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
7-32
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
j
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe conditions listed previously and,
therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid, change both the
fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change.
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-33
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
7-34
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
j Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
(Continued)
7-35
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
75,000 Miles (125 000 km) (Continued)
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j
j
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
7-36
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
(Continued)
7-37
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued)
Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-38
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellowblue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
j Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
j
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-39
yellowblue
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in
Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index
for further details.
At Least Once a Month
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Tire Inflation Check
Engine Oil Level Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
See “Tires” in the Index for further details.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Cassette Deck Service
7-40
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index
for further details.
yellowblue
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Manual Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed.
See “Manual Transmission Fluid” in the Index. Check
for leaks. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired if needed.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
“Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index. A fluid
loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and
repair if needed.
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir. See
“Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss in
this system could indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repaired at once.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in
the Index.)
7-41
yellowblue
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood hinges, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
door hinges, fuel door hinge, endgate hinges, outer
tailgate handle pivot points, tailgate hinges, tailgate
mounted spare tire carrier (if equipped), glove box,
console doors, moving seat hardware and folding seat
hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway
and try to start the engine. The starter should work
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t
pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.
7-42
yellowblue
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
(Automatic Transmission)
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
D With an automatic transmission, the key should turn
to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
D With a manual transmission, the key should turn to
LOCK only when you press the key release button.
On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI
needs service.
7-43
yellowblue
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
PARK (P) Mechanism Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
D To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
7-44
yellowblue
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in
the Index.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help
ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap is recommended at least once
a year.
7-45
yellowblue
Throttle System Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and
cruise control cables.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes
inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions
result in frequent braking.
Drive Axle Service
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add as needed.
Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive)
Inspection
Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, check front
axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary.
Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper
installation. More frequent lubrication may be required
on off-road use.
7-46
yellowblue
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine Oil
Engine Oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Brake
System
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only GM
GoodwrenchR DEX-COOLR or
HavolineR DEX-COOLR
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index.
USAGE
Windshield
Washer Solvent
FLUID/LUBRICANT
GM OptikleenR Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.
Hydraulic Clutch Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part
System
No. 12345347 or equivalent
DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB or
GC-LB.
Power Steering
System
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM
Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
Manual
Transmission
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. 12345349
or equivalent).
Delco Supreme 11R Brake Fluid
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRONR-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
7-47
yellowblue
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Rear Driveline
Center Spline
and Universal
Joints
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Front and Rear
Axle (Standard
Differential)
SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM
Part No. 1052271 or equivalent).
Constant
Velocity
Universal Joint
Rear Axle
(Locking
Differential)
SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant; use
only GM Part No. 1052271. Do
not add friction modifier.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Automatic
Transfer Case
Automatic Transfer Case Fluid
(GM Part No. 12378396).
Clutch Pushrod
to Clutch Fork
Joint
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
7-48
yellowblue
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door
Hinges
LubriplateR Lubricant Aerosol
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Tailgate
Mounted Spare
Tire Carrier (if
equipped), Outer
Tailgate Handle
Pivot Points and
Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12371287 or equivalent).
7-49
yellowblue
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the
date, odometer reading and who performed the service
in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on
the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-50
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
yellowblue
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-51
yellowblue
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-52
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
yellowblue
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Customer Assistance Offices
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation
8-9
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-11
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Service and Owner Publications
in Canada
8-
8-1
yellowblue
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will
be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
8-2
yellowblue
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate
at the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have
a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you
continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you must file
with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any
additional rights you may have. Canadian owners
refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for information on the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
D Dealership name and location
D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
8-3
yellowblue
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to
settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the
interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing any court action, use of
the program is free of charge and your case will generally
be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed
with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
8-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write
to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to Chevrolet’s
Customer Assistance Center.
United States
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USAR
yellowblue
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
GMODC - Customer Communication Centre
169-007
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 905-644-4112
Fax:
905-644-4866
Caribbean Numbers
1-800-496-9992 (English) Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Puerto Rico
1-800-751-4135 (English) Dominican Republic
1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) Dominican Republic
1-800-496-9994 U.S. Virgin Islands
1-800-389-0009 Bahamas
1-800-534-0122 Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua & B.V.I.
If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean,
call Puerto Rico 1-787-763-1315.
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward aftermarket driver or
passenger adaptive
equipment you may require
for your vehicle (hand
controls, wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830. When calling from the United
States, please dial 1-905-644-3063.
8-5
yellowblue
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
problems. If your problem cannot be resolved over the
phone, our advisors have access to a nationwide network of
dealer recommended service providers. Roadside
membership is free; however some services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy Care:
D
D
D
D
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 1999 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872). This toll-free number will provide you
over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor mechanical
8-6
Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA
Free towing for warranty repairs
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (i.e.,
wrecker services, locksmith/key service, glass
repair, etc.)
ROADSIDE Courtesy Care PROVIDES:
D Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
D FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
D FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
D FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
D FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
D FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on
the road)
yellowblue
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to eligible purchasers of 1999 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer
for details.)
Note: Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 1999 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
service management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care
at any time.
For complete program details, see your Chevrolet dealer
to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations that may be incurred for
utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
License plate number
Vehicle color
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem
Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure
inside your owner information portfolio for full
program details.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
8-7
yellowblue
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating
dealerships are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a
customer support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If it is
determined that your vehicle cannot be scheduled into
the service department immediately and is still
operative, you are encouraged to drive the vehicle until
scheduling can be accomplished.
8-8
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealerships can provide you with shuttle service
to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a
destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
yellowblue
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a
rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a
maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and
may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new
vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at
participating dealerships and all program options, such
as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the
terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.
General Motors and participating dealerships reserve the
right to deny a rental vehicle to anyone not possessing a
valid motor vehicle operators license in their name,
anyone who is under the influence of alcohol or drugs, or
anyone whose mental or physical abilities are impaired so
as to be unable to operate a motor vehicle safely.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
8-9
yellowblue
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
yellowblue
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Service manuals, owner’s manuals and other service
literature are available for purchase for all current and
past model General Motors vehicles.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
8-11
yellowblue
1999 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1999 CHEVROLET
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1999 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
8-12
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $10.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)
yellowblue
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
1-800-551-4123
(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927
1
9
9
9
PUBLICATION FORM
NUMBER
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call
1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
against the original order.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
VEHICLE MODEL
NAME
YEAR
QTY.
PRICE
EACH*
Service Manual
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
1999
$90.00
1999
$50.00
Owner’s Manual In Portfolio
1999
$15.00
Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio
1999
$10.00
TOTAL
PRICE
G
M
S
H
I
P
T
O
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
(CUSTOMER’S NAME)
(ATTENTION)
(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(CITY)
(STATE)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
(ZIP CODE)
(
)
AREA CODE
GM-CHE-ORD99
*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
only — do not send cash.)
TOTAL MATERIAL
Michigan Purchasers
add 6% sales tax
U.S. Order Processing
MasterCard
VISA
$5.00
Canadian Postage
(See Note Below)
GRAND TOTAL
Discover
Account
Number:
Expiration
Date mo/yr:
Check here if your billing address
is different from your shipping
address shown.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50 plus the
U.S. order processing.
8-13
yellowblue
✍
8-14
NOTES
yellowblue
Section 9 Index
A
ccessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . 6-3
Adding Sound Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Add-On Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Air Bag
Adding Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25, 2-77
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
What Makes it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
What You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Air Conditioning Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Alignment and Balance, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Antenna, Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 2-80, 4-7
Anti-Lock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Appearance Care
9- and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Armrest, Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Automatic Transmission
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Park Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Axle
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Backglass Wiper, Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Charge Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Replacement, Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 5-4
9-1
yellowblue
BBB Auto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Blizzard, Driving In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Brakes
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Pedal Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Replacing System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock Check . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
BTSI Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34, 6-65
C
anadian Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 2-38, 4-40, 4-51
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Cargo Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Center Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
9-2
Certification/Tire Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Gages Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Seat Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . .
Top Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Where Not to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Breakers and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaner, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Lamps and Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior Plastic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-42
4-50
6-48
5-19
2-77
2-85
1-56
6-56
1-42
1-50
1-48
1-50
1-47
1-50
1-46
2-65
6-59
6-15
6-55
6-54
6-50
6-52
6-50
6-52
6-52
6-52
6-53
6-51
yellowblue
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Windshield, Backglass and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2, 3-3
Clock, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Compact Disc Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Console-Mounted CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Content-Theft Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Coolant Heater, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
D
amage, Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Damage, Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Dead Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Defects, Reporting Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Dimensions, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Disabilities, GM Mobility Program for Persons with . . . . 8-5
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Door
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Drive, Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Drive Axle Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Driver Information System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Driving
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
In a Blizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
On Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Rainy Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Snowy and Icy Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Driving On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Drunken Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
9-3
yellowblue
E
asy Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Electrical Equipment, Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41, 6-59
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Endgate/Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Manual Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 2-11
Remote Rearglass Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Endgate-Mounted Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Coolant Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Fan Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Kind to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
When to Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
9-4
Exhaust, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Express-Down Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
F
abric Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Fifth Gear, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Filter
Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Remote Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
First Gear, Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
First Gear, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Fog Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Foreign Countries, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fourth Gear, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26, 6-22
Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . 2-29
French Language Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Front Map Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Front Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51, 2-56
Front Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
yellowblue
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Filling a Portable Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Fuse Block
Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56, 2-68
Gas Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Gate Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Gear Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities . . . . . 8-5
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Guide en Français . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Hearing Impaired, Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Hitches, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Hydraulic Clutch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Ignition
Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Inflation, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42, 7-39
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
9-5
yellowblue
Inspections
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Exhaust Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Front Drive Axle Boot Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Throttle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73, 2-74
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
J
acking Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
K
ey in the Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Key Lock Cylinders Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Key Release Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Labels
Certification/Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60, 6-62
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Service Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
9-6
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Front Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Front Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51, 2-56
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Leaving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-36
Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Lights
Air Bag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25, 2-77
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80, 4-7
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Check Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Gate Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Safety Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 2-76
Security Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Service 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26, 2-78
Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Lockout Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
yellowblue
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Ignition Transmission Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Key Lock Cylinder Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Rear Door Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Low Fuel Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Lubricants and Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Lubrication Service, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3, 1-4
M
aintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Long Trip/Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6, 7-28
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Short Trip/City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5, 7-7
Maintenance, Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Manual Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Manual Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Manual Transmission
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Convex Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Electrochromic Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Illuminated Visor Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Inside Day/Night Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Visor Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Model Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Neutral, Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Neutral, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Vehicle “Break-In” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Night Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-23
2-25
2-16
4-28
6-66
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Opener, Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56, 2-68
Operating Your Vehicle Off Paved Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Ordering Owner and Service Publications . . . . . . . 8-12, 8-13
9-7
yellowblue
Outside Mirror
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Manual Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Power Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Overheating Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 8-13
P
aint Spotting, Chemical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Parking
At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Brake Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
On Hills with a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Your Vehicle, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
PasslockR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Power
Accessory Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
9-8
Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Control Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Pregnancy, Use of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Problems on the Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Publications, Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 8-13
R
adiator, Adding Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Radios
AM-FM Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12, 3-15, 3-20
Cassette Tape Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42, 7-40
Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24, 3-28
Compact Disc Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Remote Cassette Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Rain, Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Rear
Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Safety Belt Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
yellowblue
Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Window Washer/Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Reclining Front Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Recovery Tank, Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Replacement
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Restraints
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Retained Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Reverse, Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Reverse, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Roadside Assistance, Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Rocking Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Safety Belts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Center Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Center Rear Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39, 1-53
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
How to Wear Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30, 1-38
Lap-Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16, 1-32
Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Rear Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Rear Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Why They Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Seatback
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Reclining Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Seats and Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Second Gear, Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Second Gear, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Security Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
9-9
yellowblue
Service 4WD Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 8-13
Service Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Service Work, Doing Your Own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26, 2-78
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21, 2-24
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Signaling Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Speech Impaired, Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Stains, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Steering
In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Steering Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
9-10
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Symbols, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
T
achometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Taillamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Tape Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Temperature and Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
THEFTLOCKR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Third Gear, Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Third Gear, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Time, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Tire Inflation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Tire Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Tires
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Buying New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Changing a Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42, 7-39
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Uniform Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
yellowblue
Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
When It’s Time for New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Top Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Torque Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Torque, Wheel Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28, 6-65
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Tow/Haul Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Towing, Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Trailer
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Driving on Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Driving with a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Maintenance When Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Parking on Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Total Weight on Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Transfer Case, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Transfer Case, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Transmission Fluid
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Transmitters, Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Transportation, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Trip, Before Leaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
TTY Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Underbody Maintenance
........................
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erasing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rolling Code Openers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Used Replacement Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-56
2-68
2-71
2-71
2-70
2-69
2-71
6-48
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Damage Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Visors, Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
9-11
yellowblue
W
arning Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Washer Fluid, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Weatherstrip Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Wheel
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28, 6-65
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Windows
Express-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Swing-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
9-12
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Blade Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Wiper Blades, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Wiring, Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising